JP7330656B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a variable display is performed in a short fluctuation time during a big win. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine equipped with a short-time mode in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected.

JP 2019-217007 A

The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has room for improvement .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve amusement in games.

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
a performance execution means;
a display means;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The production executing means is
a first special display representing the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means when being controlled to the first special state;
It is possible to execute a first specific change effect that changes the mode of the first special display,
a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means when being controlled to the second special state;
It is possible to execute a second specific change effect that changes the mode of the second special display,
A game machine, wherein a cycle in which the mode of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than a cycle in which the mode of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In addition, in the second special state in which the special variable display is performed at a high rate, the period in which the mode of the second special display changes is short, so that the short variable display period in the second special state can be emphasized. .

In addition, the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention and the configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table for normal state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot classification determination table for time saving states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a high-speed time-saving small hit. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding rush fluctuation deviation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to rush fluctuation/loss. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to rush fluctuation/loss. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to rush fluctuation/loss. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to rush fluctuation/loss. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding pseudo-fluctuation deviation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding pseudo fluctuation deviation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding pseudo fluctuation deviation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a direct jackpot. a It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (dream RUSH). a It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (dream RUSH). a It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). a It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). a It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for b time saving states (invincible RUSH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the control table after hitting according to game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small-hit completion|finish process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a game flow. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the variable display of the decorative design in Dream RUSH. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a first logo cycle changing effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a second logo cycle changing effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the variable display of the decorative design in super high-speed HYPER RUSH. It is a front view of a movable body, a logo panel, and an image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st look-ahead effect|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st look-ahead effect|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 2nd look-ahead effect|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 2nd look-ahead effect|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode determination table for changing effects; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a first look-ahead effect execution presence/absence determination table, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a second look-ahead effect execution/non-execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of waiting for the start of fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during fluctuation|variation. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a symbol 3R normal jackpot occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode when a symbol 3R normal jackpot occurs; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect in the case where the symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when design 10Ra time-saving big hit generate|occur|produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when design 10Ra time-saving big hit generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when the symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when design 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when design 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when design 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a big win with a big win occurrence count value of 3 occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode when a big win with a big win occurrence count value of 3 occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode when a big win with a big win occurrence count value of 3 occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a normal small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case where a normal small hit generate|occur|produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case where a normal small hit generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and pending digestion periods; It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending consumption period, and the number of second pending memories. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending consumption period, and the number of second pending memories. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending consumption period, and the number of second pending memories.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one having an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of Effects, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and making the game lively) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be described. As for the characteristic portion 152F, a technique for a pachinko machine capable of setting, by setting means, setting values such as the odds of winning a jackpot with different degrees of advantage for the player will be described. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player as the set value of the winning probability of the big win. .

First, setting values will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the odds of winning a jackpot change depending on the set value when a person on the game hall side (such as a store clerk at the game hall) changes settings using operating means such as predetermined switches. It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, the setting change process that allows the probability of winning the big hit to be changed is executed. The set value consists of six stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the degree of advantage increases in the order of setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. increase step by step. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to six stages as long as they are provided in a plurality of stages. Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can also be said that it is to do.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high setting with a high probability of winning a big win, and setting values 1 to 3 are called low setting with a low probability of winning a big win.

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changed by setting the set values 1 to 6 in the same manner as the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win. The selection probability of the variation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win.

Regarding the characteristic portion 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is hit (jackpot or small hit). There is a case where a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled by hit is stored is executed. Concretely, the pending series is the pending information that exists when the big win occurs, and there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the big win gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the big win occurred. It refers to continuous hits within the reservation information range in which the next hits occur continuously within the range of (reserved). In the case of a small win, a big win via a small win is made based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserve information of a small win can be said to be the reserve storage information of a win that will become a big win in the future. When such a holding series is executed, there is a case where an informing effect for informing that it is a holding series is executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F, the same reference numerals and explanations as those in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are omitted, and different parts will be explained.

In the game area where the hit game ball can flow down, the first path of the downflow paths for the game ball is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of separate routes, or may be routes that are partly shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 . The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting opening switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V determination winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game area of the game areas can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning hole in which game balls can win. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered the respective passage gates 41, there is a gate switch 21 inside the passage gate 41, a second start opening switch 22B inside the second start winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure into which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the top end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, there is provided a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) capable of switching the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning prize area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize prize switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and a game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 2. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all the discharged game balls are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nail being planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward about the bottom side to reveal the big winning opening ( opening). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting entering game balls. To the special variable winning ball device 7, a winning route is defined by a game nail or other structures so that a game ball can enter the big winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

The big hit is when the big win pattern (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big win is decided by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole, the big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small winning game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small winning". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is called "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a given value, and the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state for a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined condition for terminating the open state (a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area, the condition for starting the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The game is started based on establishment of a state of non-execution and non-execution of a jackpot game, and after a fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, a display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable displays for which the conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a second reserve consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entering the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second holding indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit up by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, there is provided a first reservation display 25A consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening, that is, the number of first reservation storage. . The first pending indicator 25A increases the number of indicator lights by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the left-hand shot is switched to the right-hand shot, and the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 which is opened. . After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is set, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, during the time saving state, right-handed promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port. Play games like this. In addition, when the time saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to return to left handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole by striking to the right. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole and the display result becomes a big win (a big win by a special pattern), a game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right. Also, if the game ball wins in the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, so V judgment is made while striking to the right. A game is played aiming at the winning device 87 . At the start of the small-hit game state, a small-hit start notification is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the start of the small-hit game state. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the game situation (depending on the game situation) , or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small hit display), the right hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When a V prize has been won, a V prize is announced on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V prize has been won. Further, when the small-hit game state ends, a small-hit end notification for notifying that the small-hit game state has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 . After the end of the small win, a big win game state is entered and the special variable winning ball device 7 is released, so the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right.

Further, when a game is performed aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win is performed. does not occur. Thus, when V winning is not generated during the small winning game state, V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning game state has ended. After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning hole by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving termination notification for notifying that the time-saving is finished on the screen of the image display device 5 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short-time big hit, the pattern 4R short-time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short-time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short-time big hit, and the small hit 5 (4) ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 15, and the player can win the same big prize as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is substantially 4, and the player can win the same big winning as the pattern 4R short-time jackpot with regard to opening the big winning opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of time-saving end conditions that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 time is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning) may be used in the first route). and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 8-3 shows the random number type, update range, use, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special prize determination table, a second special prize determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with the random R is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure per determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the set value. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. is extracted (random R). As for the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, "symbol 15R short time jackpot" and "symbol 4R short time jackpot" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the and is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the “symbol 15R time-saving jackpot”, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (C) and (D), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (E), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "16 (15) R short time big hit via small hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the 9 (8) R short-time big hit via a small hit and the 5 (4) R short-time big hit via a small hit is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

Main commands will be explained in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that designates a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, when subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that designates the start of the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first start winning slot. In addition, based on the winning of the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) to Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserve storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning slot.

Such storage of information relating to starting winnings in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the reservation storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but at the start of the variation of the special symbol. You may make it extract.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process of S101. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process for judging in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, after the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as reserved storage information, the start condition for the variable display is When established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S110), based on the reserved storage information, the variable display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display is determined as a big hit display result and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening Or at the timing when the second start winning opening is started (timing when the retention memory information is stored), the retention memory information storing various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read in advance, and based on the prefetched retention memory information Then, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the type of variation pattern will be performed in advance according to the above-described various random numbers. Based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value, a prize-winning effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead announcement that gives a notice of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the game.

Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1216), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the first reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 each time the start winning opening is started.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starter switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 22B is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the same winning effect processing as the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected starting winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1226), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the second reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening is entered, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and A set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If it is determined in S51 that there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer, a process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. will be On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. is done.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage, Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, in RAM 102, CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM102 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening, that is, "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol. or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer and executes a judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the holding memory buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value with a random number for big-hit determination, and executes a process of determining a big-hit or a small-hit when they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit or the process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will be one of the big hits shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", select the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C) (S73), and proceed to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) (S74). , S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) By using the determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S77). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. do. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable portion 872 in an open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that the small-hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small hit open process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning ball number counter is set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" at S430, it is checked whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit open control timer based on the open mode of the small hit. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball counter set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9 is counted down to "-1" (S439), and a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is transmitted. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the determination winning device 87 can be performed. It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, thereby closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the small hit ending process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and restore the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, which will be described later, the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V judgment winning a prize. A game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins the V prize in the V prize area 870, so that the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot will be legally awarded due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, according to the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (eg, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 02TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 02TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-66.
In this embodiment, it is possible to update the count value (jackpot occurrence count value) corresponding to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.
In addition, when the count value exceeds a predetermined value (the mode switching determination value (“3” in this example) or more), the variable display period is changed when the count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching determination value (“3” in this example) or more). In this example, it can be shorter than the variable display period of less than "3")).
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a specific display (big hit count display) regarding the relationship between the count value and the predetermined value.

[Decorative design, small design]
Each design for production (decorative design, small design) in this embodiment will be described in detail.

<Decorative design>
In the present embodiment, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of kinds of decorations as decoration identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. A variable display of the pattern is performed. The decoration pattern in this embodiment is composed of a number pattern representing a number or the like.

The decorative pattern including the number pattern in this embodiment is a decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers "1" to "7", for example, a decorative pattern including the number "1" to the number "7". .

In addition, in the present embodiment, among the decorative patterns, the even patterns (number patterns corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6") are in the blue mode (in this example, decorative patterns indicated by blue numbers) ), and among the decorative patterns, the odd patterns excluding the number "7" (the number patterns corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5") are red (in this example, indicated by red numbers) Among the decorative patterns, the odd-numbered patterns of the number "7" (the number patterns corresponding to the number "7") are gold mode (in this example, the decorative patterns indicated by gold numbers). .

(Confirmed decoration design)
In this embodiment, a first special game or a second special game is started in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 as an effect executed according to the progress of the game. Corresponding to this, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped/fixed in the first special game or the second special game, a pattern matching effect is executed, and the display result is a variable display of decorative patterns. A fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In this embodiment, the types of fixed decorative symbols are varied according to the display results and the types of big hits (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). In this embodiment, as the fixed decoration pattern, the types of the lost pattern, the even numbered pattern, and the odd numbered pattern are set.

<small pattern>
In this embodiment, a small pattern is a pattern smaller than the decoration pattern displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5 and indicates whether or not the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special pattern. called. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r are displayed from the left in the upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. The upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are variably displayed and statically displayed, is also shared with the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first pending display area 02TM01E for displaying the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 02TM01). A second pending display area 02TM02E for displaying a second pending storage number (0 to 4 second pending displays 02TM02) is provided in the lower right portion of the screen of the device 5 . In addition, at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 02TM03, which is the information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed and the information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed, is displayed. An active display area 02TM03E is provided.

In addition, a first reserved storage number display area for displaying the first reserved storage number may be provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reservation display area 02TM01E). A second reserved memory number display area 02TM06E for displaying the second reserved memory number may be provided in the section (upper portion of the second reserved memory area 02TM02E).

Here, in the first reserved display area 02TM01E, the number of objects (round images) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and in the second reserved display area 02TM02E, the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed.

[Time saving state]
In this embodiment, in the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (period for varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state in the present embodiment is (A) that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, (B) that it is controlled to a big hit game state, or (C) that it is controlled to a small hit game state of a specific type. It continues until any one of the end conditions is met first. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut time reduction).

In this embodiment, a time saving state and b time saving state are provided as types of the time saving state. In the time-saving state, (A) 10,000 times of the special game with the second special symbol was executed, (B) it was controlled to the big hit game state, and (C) it corresponded to the normal small hit described later. The game is terminated when any one termination condition of being controlled to the small winning game state is satisfied.

Also, in the b time saving state, when any one of (A) the special game with the second special symbol has been executed 10000 times, or (B) the jackpot game state is established. to end. In the b time saving state, unlike the a time saving state, (C) being controlled to the small hit game state corresponding to the normal small hit is not the end condition (see FIG. 9-21 (3) No. 3-1) .

[Hit type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a winning type table. Of the hit type table, FIG. 9-1 (1) is a diagram showing a big hit type table, and FIG. 9-1 (2) is a diagram showing a small hit via big hit type table. The win type table shows, for each type of big win, conditions for occurrence of a big win, control state (game state) after the big win, number of opening times (number of rounds) in the big win, and opening time of each round in the big win.

In this embodiment, as the types of jackpots, "symbol 3R normal jackpot", "symbol 10Ra time-shorter jackpot", "symbol 10Rb time-shorter jackpot", "10Ra time-shorter jackpot via normal small hit", and "10Ra time-shorter jackpot via short-time jackpot". is provided.

A small hit occurs when the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and an opening pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first opening pattern" as appropriate) in which the number of times of opening is 1 and the time of opening is 0.04 seconds, and the number of times of opening is 10 times. The operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in one of the opening patterns with an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as "second opening pattern" as appropriate).

In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. The jackpot via small hit includes “10Ra short-time jackpot via normal jackpot” and “10Ra short-time jackpot via short-time jackpot” in which the opening patterns of the V-judgment winning device 87 are different.

In this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via normal small win" has the first opening pattern of the V judgment winning device 87, and the game ball wins the V judgment winning device 87. It is extremely difficult to do so, and it cannot be expected to generate a big hit. Also, if the V prize cannot be won in this small hit that occurred while being controlled in the a time saving state, it will be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the a time saving state after the end of the small hit (Fig. 9-24). Therefore, the small hit corresponding to this "10Ra time-saving big hit via normal small-hit" is a small hit that is substantially controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Hereinafter, this small hit will be referred to as a "normal small win", a "falling small win", or a "first small win".

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via the short-time small hit" has the second opening pattern of the V-judgment winning device 87, and the game ball is sent to the V-judgment winning device 87. Winning is extremely easy, and a big win can be expected. In addition, when it is possible to win a V prize in this small win generated while being controlled to the a time saving state, after the big win corresponding to the small win is finished, the a time saving state is controlled. Therefore, the small hit corresponding to this "10Ra time-saving big hit via the time-saving small hit" is substantially the small win controlled to the time-saving state next time as well. Hereinafter, this small hit will be referred to as a "time saving small win", a "continuous small win" or a "second small win" as appropriate.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpots include "symbol 3R normal jackpot", "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and "symbol 10Rb time-short jackpot" which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

In this way, as the big hits, the symbol big hits directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the small winnings based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are passed through. A big win via a small win generated by a V prize is included.

As shown in FIG. 9-1(1), the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). The game state controlled after the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is the normal state.

In addition, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the a time-saving state.

In the time saving state, among the end conditions described above, the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special pattern is 10000 times, and the total number of times of fluctuation display of the first special design and the second special design is 10004 times. Two end states are set with a condition (not shown). Such a number of times of the end condition of the time-saving state of 10000 times of the variable display of the second special symbol is about 100% of the game balls that entered the V judgment winning device 87 when the "time-saving small hit" occurred. It is set in consideration of entering the V winning area 870 at a rate of . In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the time saving state that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 10000 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility of generating a small hit at a rate of about 100%. It is set to a certain number of times, and it is a state in which the next small hit is substantially decided. However, in the present embodiment in which there are a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win" as the small wins that occur in the time-saving state a, when the "normal small win" occurs, a big win occurs. It will be controlled to the normal state.

In addition, the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is b time-saving state.

The b time saving state after "symbol 10Rb time saving big hit" is the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special pattern is 10000 times among the above-mentioned end conditions, and the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special design and the second special design. Two end states are set, namely, the end condition (not shown) that the total number of times of is 10004 times. Such a number of times of the end condition of the b time saving state that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 10000 times is about 100% of the game balls that entered the V judgment winning device 87 when the "time saving small hit" occurred It is set in consideration of entering the V winning area 870 at a rate of . In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the b time saving state that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 10000 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility of generating a small hit at a rate of about 100%. It is set to a certain number of times, and it is a state in which the next small hit is substantially decided. However, in the present embodiment, there are a "normal small hit" and a "time-saving small hit" in the small hits that occur in the b time saving state, even if the "normal small hit" occurs, the big hit is Without occurring, it is continuously controlled to the b time saving state. Therefore, the b time saving state is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed until the "time saving small win" is substantially won, and the small win via the big win is generated at a rate of about 100%. Generally, the next big hit is decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (2), "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" is conditional on V winning after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.04 seconds x 1 time). It is a big win in which the big prize opening is opened nine times (9R), a total of ten times (10R). In addition, the “10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit” is a total of 10 times (9R), after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and the big winning mouth is 9 times (9R) under the condition of V winning. It is a jackpot that is opened twice (10R). These short-time jackpots via small wins are opened by the prize-winning device for one round, but the number of times the jackpot is opened is actually 10 times, and the player, regarding the opening of the jackpot, is a symbol 10R short-time jackpot. It feels like a similar or similar jackpot type.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are the first. It is provided in the path and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and In another state such as a small winning game state, the second route is easier to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be employed in which it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down, and in other game states it is advantageous to the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-2(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for judging the variation pattern , the random number MR4 for judging the result of the display of the general pattern, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable.

Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-2(A). The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

[Display result determination table]
FIGS. 9-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a [first special symbol] display result determination table. [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit for the first special symbol, and is a big hit judgment value compared with the random number MR1 and a small hit judgment. A table with values. In FIG. 9-2 (B1), the upper stage is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a small prize.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/319.7. Also, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.

FIG. 9-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a [for second special symbol] display result determination table. [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit for the second special symbol, and is a big hit judgment value compared with the random number MR1 and a small hit judgment. A table with values. In FIG. 9-2 (B2), the upper stage is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a small prize.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/319.7. Also, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example in which a small hit is provided in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a small hit is provided in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. You may employ|adopt the structure which provides a hit. For example, while the second special symbol is provided with a small hit, the first special symbol may not be provided with a small hit.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 104 is activated at a predetermined timing. to extract the count value (random value MR1).

For the first start winning prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [first special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the first special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [first special symbol] display result judgment table, and the extracted value is any small If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the first special symbol.

For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the second special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and the extracted value is any small If it matches the hit determination value, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small win gaming state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a hit pattern.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9-3 and FIG. 9-4 are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit via big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined when the game state is the normal state, and a small win when the game state is the normal state. It is a small hit via big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined.

FIG. 9-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is determined when the game state is the time saving state a and the time saving state b, and the game state is the time saving state a And b is a small hit via big hit type determination table used for determining the small hit via big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined to be a small hit when it is in the time saving state.

In these jackpot type determination tables and jackpot via jackpot type determination tables, the number of times of time-saving control executed after each jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot via jackpot type) and the type of fixed decoration pattern and a big-hit determination value, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for judging the type of big-hit.

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
FIG. 9-3 (A1) is used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is the normal state [for the first special symbol] jackpot type It is a judgment table. FIG. 9-3 (A2) is used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is the normal state [for the second special symbol] jackpot type decision table”.

([For the first special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
In the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table in FIG. A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "10Ra time-saving big hit" and "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit" is set.

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 119 (40%) of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "symbol 3R normal jackpot", 120 to 239 (40%) are assigned to the "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot", and 240 to 299 (20%) are assigned to the "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (A1) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to each big hit type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 0 times for "symbol 3R normal jackpot", 10000 times for "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot", and 10000 times for "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (A1) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to each of the jackpot types. In this example, the types of fixed decorative patterns are "symbol 3R normal jackpot" is an even number pattern, "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is an odd number pattern excluding number pattern "7", and "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a number pattern "7". " is an odd number pattern.

([For the second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
In the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9-3 (A2), a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, corresponding to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" Big hit judgment value is set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 299 (100%) of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". .

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (A2) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for the "symbol 10Ra time saving big hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (A2) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to each of the jackpot types. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered symbol whose type of fixed decorative symbol is the number symbol "7".

<Normal state small hit via jackpot type determination table>
FIG. 9-3 (B1) is used to determine the type of via-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-hit hit when the first special symbol is determined to be a sub-hit when the gaming state is the normal state [first For special symbols] It is a small hit via big hit type determination table. FIG. 9-3 (B2) is used to determine the type of via-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-sub-hit hit when the second special symbol is determined to be a sub-hit when the gaming state is the normal state [Second For special symbols] It is a small hit via big hit type determination table.

([For the 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
In the [first special symbol] small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. A big hit judgment value corresponding to "short time big hit" is set.

In this example, [for the first special symbol] in the jackpot type determination table via small hit, 0 to 299 (100%) out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "10Ra time short jackpot via normal small hit ” is assigned.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B1) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type via the small hit. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B1) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small hits. In this example, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal jackpot" is a lost pattern as the type of fixed decorative pattern. In the present embodiment, when a V winning occurs when a "normal small win" occurs, the game is controlled to the big win game state and then to the normal state (see FIGS. 9-19).

([For the second special symbol] Judgment table for big hit via small hit)
In the [second special symbol] small hit big hit type determination table in FIG. A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "big hit" and "10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit" is set.

In this example, [for the second special symbol] in the jackpot type determination table via small hit, 0 to 74 (25%) out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "10Ra time short jackpot via normal small hit ”, 75 to 299 (75%) are assigned to “10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit”.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B2) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type via the small hit. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small win" and 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small win".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B2) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot types via small hits. In this example, the type of the fixed decorative pattern is "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit", which is a losing pattern or a special pattern to be described later, and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via short-time small hit" is an odd number pattern "7". It is a design.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 second when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in the normal state. Various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare effects.

Also, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the normal state is set to 0.1 second. Various effects executed during this small-win fanfare period are referred to as small-win fanfare effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern fixing period is set to 0.5 seconds (not shown) in any variation pattern of the variation display executed in the normal state.

<Jackpot type determination table for time-saving state a and time-saving b state>
Figure 9-4 (A1), when the game state is a time saving state (a time saving state or b time saving state) when it is determined to be a big hit by the first special symbol [for the first special symbol] jackpot type determination table is. FIG. 9-4 (A2) is a [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving state.

([For the first special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
In the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table in FIG. A big hit determination value corresponding to each "10Ra time-saving big hit" is set.

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 239 (80%) of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "symbol 3Rb short time jackpot", 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (A1) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for "symbol 3Rb time saving big hit" and 10000 times for "symbol 10Ra time saving big hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (A1) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to each of the jackpot types. In this example, the types of fixed decorative symbols are "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" are number patterns "3" and odd number patterns, and "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" are number patterns "7".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1), when the game state is determined to be a big hit by the first special symbol when it is a time saving state (a time saving state or b time saving state), "symbol 3Rb time saving big hit" Or when it is determined as one of the big hit types of "symbol 10Ra time saving big hit", when it is determined as a big hit by the first special symbol when the game state is the time saving state, it is possible to perform appropriate production control. can.

Specifically, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is won at the time of the first hit, this embodiment is controlled to the b time-saving state in which the next jackpot is substantially confirmed. Effect to notify that a total of 3000 prize balls will be given (1500 balls) and prize balls (1500 balls) for 10 rounds of the big hit that is substantially confirmed next time (3000 notification to be described later) effect) is executed at the time of the first hit, and the player recognizes that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see FIG. 9-54).

In addition, in spite of being controlled to the b time saving state, if the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed for some reason, it occurred during the period until the variable display that was won at the beginning was completed. Variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the start winning (variable display whose execution is suspended (maximum 4 in this example)) may be executed. A big hit that occurs when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed at this time is determined to be a "big hit" (hereinafter referred to as "irregular special 1 big hit" as appropriate.) Depending on the type of big hit , the number of prize balls given/to be given is different.

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot”,
(A1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 pieces)
(A2) Prize balls for 3 rounds of irregular special 1 jackpot (450 pieces)
(A3) Prize balls for 10 rounds of big hits (1500 pieces) that are substantially confirmed next time in the b time-saving state that is controlled after the irregular special 1 big hit
It is virtually certain that a total of 3450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot”,
(B1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 pieces)
(B2) Prize balls for 10 rounds of irregular special 1 jackpot (1500 pieces)
It is virtually certain that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the a time saving state controlled after the irregular special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is not substantially confirmed, so here (B3) 10 rounds worth of prize balls (1500 pieces) are given. is not considered to be substantially determined.

In this way, in the present embodiment in which the player is made to recognize that a total of 3000 prize balls will be provided by the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first hit, even if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs. Also, when the game state is the time-saving state and the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined to be either a ``symbol 3Rb time-saving big hit'' or a ``symbol 10Ra time-saving big hit''. By doing so, it is possible to give 3,000 or more prize balls, and it is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring with the performance contents of the 3,000 notification performance at the time of the first hit, and the number of prize balls to be given is improved. However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disadvantageous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a time saving state (a time saving state or b time saving state) and the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, it is not determined as a big hit type of "symbol 10Rb time saving big hit". .

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot”,
(C1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 pieces)
(C2) Prize balls for 10 rounds of irregular special 1 jackpot (1500 pieces)
(A3) Prize balls for 10 rounds of big hits (1500 pieces) that are substantially confirmed next time in the b time-saving state that is controlled after the irregular special 1 big hit
It is virtually decided that a total of 4,500 prize balls will be given, and a contradiction occurs with respect to the effect content of the 3,000 notification effect at the time of the first hit, and the number of prize balls to be given does not affect the player. is excessively advantageous, ``symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit'' is not provided as a jackpot type when a big win is determined by the first special pattern when the game state is a time-saving state.

([For the second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
In the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9-4 (A2), a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, corresponding to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" Big hit judgment value is set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 299 (100%) of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". .

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (A2) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for the "symbol 10Ra time saving big hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (A2) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot types. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered symbol whose type of fixed decorative symbol is the number symbol "7".

<A time saving state, b time saving state small hit via big hit type determination table>
FIG. 9-4 (B1) shows that when the game state is a time-saving state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state), the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit [for the first special symbol] small hit via It is a jackpot classification determination table. FIG. 9-4 (B2) is a [for second special symbol] small hit via big hit type determination table when it is determined to be a small hit by the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state.

([For the 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
In the [first special symbol] small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. A big hit judgment value corresponding to "short time big hit" is set.

In this example, [for the first special symbol] in the jackpot type determination table via small hit, 0 to 299 (100%) out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "10Ra time short jackpot via normal small hit ” is assigned.

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B1) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type via the small hit. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B1) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small hits. In this example, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal jackpot" is a lost pattern as the type of fixed decorative pattern.

([For the second special symbol] Judgment table for big hit via small hit)
In the [second special symbol] small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "time saving big hit" and "time saving big hit via 10Ra time saving big hit" is set.

In this example, [for the second special symbol] in the jackpot type determination table via small hit, 0 to 74 (25%) out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "10Ra time short jackpot via normal small hit ”, 75 to 299 (75%) are assigned to “10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit”.

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B2) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to the big hit type via the small hit. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small win" and 10000 times for "10 Ra time saving big hit via normal small win".

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B2) also shows the types of fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small hits. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern is "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit". The special pattern shown), and the “10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit” is an odd number design that is a number design “7”.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a jackpot or a jackpot via a jackpot occurs in the time saving state a or the time saving state b. Various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare effects.

In addition, the small winning fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a small winning occurs in the short time a state or the short time b normal state. Various effects executed during this small-win fanfare period are referred to as small-win fanfare effects.

Also, in any of the variation patterns of the variation display executed in the time saving state a or the time saving state b, the pattern fixing period is set to 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 9-15 to 9-20).

[Variation pattern judgment]
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above in accordance with the predetermined result. Determine the variation pattern.

<Variation pattern without reach>
In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns without reach ("long fluctuation miss", "high speed miss", "super high speed miss", "high speed short hit", "super high speed short time hit", "rush fluctuation miss", "Rush fluctuation big hit", "rush fluctuation short hit", "pseudo fluctuation loss", "direct hit", ("high speed normal small hit" = "high speed loss")", etc.) The fluctuation display has started A variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established later and the result of the variation display will be one of "loss", "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" is displayed. be.

In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns without reach when the variation display result is "loss", the variation display period is 1000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "high speed failure", and "super high speed failure" is determined. is 200 ms, and the fluctuation display period is 10000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "Long fluctuation is not correct", and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Rush fluctuation is not correct". The variation display period is 30200 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "pseudo variation error", and the variation display period is 2800 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "pseudo variation error".

In addition, among the variation patterns that do not involve reach when the variation display result is a "big hit", the variation display period is 10,000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be a "straight hit", and the variation is a "rush variation big hit". The variable display period when it is determined to be a pattern is 40000 ms.

In addition, among the variation patterns that do not involve reach when the variation display result is "time-saving small hit", the variation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small hit" variation pattern is 5000ms, and "super high speed The variation display period is 500 ms when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "time saving small hit", and the variation display period is 30500 ms when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "rush variation time saving small hit".

The variation display period is 1000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed normal small hit" among the variation patterns without reach when the variation display result is a "normal small win".

Regarding the fluctuation pattern of normal small hit during b time saving In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is "normal small hit" in the b time saving state, it is determined as a "high speed normal small hit" fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern of this "high-speed normal small hit" is a variation pattern of the same effect mode as the variation pattern of "high-speed loss", and after the start of the variation display, the result of the variation display is "loss" without achieving reach. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, "245", etc.) corresponding to . When the "normal small win" occurs in the b time saving state, even if V winning does not occur, it is continuously controlled to the b time saving state (that is, it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)) This embodiment In (see FIG. 9-24), in the b time saving state, there is no need to notify that the fluctuation display result is "normal small hit", so the same fluctuation pattern as when the fluctuation display result is "miss" I am using

<Example of production of “super high speed reduction hit”>
An example of the effect when the variation pattern is "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit" will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related when the variation pattern is "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win".

Figures 9-5 (1) and (2) show various effect images and third decoration patterns corresponding to the effect mode being [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which will be described later in Figures 9-28 (1) and (2). ), the explanation is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be reduced and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display the third Display the decoration pattern in a reduced size. The combination of the third decoration symbols at this time is the combination of the third decoration symbols ("777" in this example) corresponding to the display result of the variable display being the "time saving small win".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. stops displaying the third decorative pattern combination ("777" in this example) that is a "time-saving small hit" (that is, the pattern matching effect is executed with respect to the third decorative pattern). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("777" in this example) is fixed and stopped (that is, the pattern matching effect is executed with respect to the third decoration pattern). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game in the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small winning game start image. . This small-hit game start image is an image containing a small-hit right-handed promotion image including characters "Aim for V!"

[Inrush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the variation pattern executed in the first variation of the time-saving state a when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 (that is, the first variation of the "super-high-speed HYPER RUSH" controlled for the first time) is the variation pattern (first half) and fluctuation pattern (second half). In the fluctuation pattern (first half), for example, a fluctuation pattern of "rush fluctuation" is executed. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (second half) corresponding to each variation display result is executed after the variation pattern of "rush variation" is executed in the variation pattern (first half).

In the variation pattern (second half), the variation display of the ornamental pattern is performed to notify the display result of the variation display. This effect is called "display result notification variation effect". In the display result notification fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern (second half), for example, if the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern (200ms) of "super high speed loss", and the fluctuation display result is "time saving small hit In the case of ", the variation display of the variation pattern (500 ms) of "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit" is executed.

The "rush fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) means that after the information suggesting the currently controlled production mode is displayed, the pseudo-variation production of the decorative pattern (the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the reach is A simulation in which the combination of decorative symbols that are "lost" without being established is temporarily stopped, and after that, the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the combination of decorative symbols that is "losing" without achieving reach is temporarily stopped. A performance that repeats fluctuations) is executed, and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed again and information suggesting that the currently controlled performance mode is started is displayed. This is the variation pattern (see Figures 9-7 and 9-9). Hereinafter, a series of performances from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols among the pseudo fluctuations to the temporary stop of the combination of the decorative symbols that become "lost" without reaching reach is appropriately referred to as "unit pseudo fluctuation". Therefore, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the unit pseudo-fluctuation is executed a plurality of times.

In the "rush variation" in the present embodiment, the information suggesting the currently controlled production mode is the characters "super high speed" or the characters "super high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start suggesting production" as appropriate). ), and the information suggesting that the presently controlled production mode is started is the characters "super high speed HYPER RUSH" and the characters "super high speed HYPER RUSH rush" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start (referred to as "notification effect").

In addition, the pseudo-variation effect of the decorative pattern in the "rush fluctuation" is the period from the start of the first variable display of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the combination of decorative patterns that becomes "lost" without reaching the reach. (hereinafter referred to as “unit pseudo fluctuation period”), the second unit pseudo fluctuation period is shorter, and the third unit pseudo fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo fluctuation period. there is Thereafter, similarly, a configuration is adopted in which the unit pseudo fluctuation period is shortened each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed, that is, the speed of the pseudo fluctuation is accelerated. Hereinafter, such a pseudo-fluctuation effect will be appropriately referred to as an "acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect." In this example, in the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation production, unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed all seven times.

In this way, in the variation pattern of the first variation of the "rapid variation" of the "super-high-speed HYPER RUSH" that is controlled for the first time, the acceleration pseudo-variation effect is executed, and the variation display of the [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is digested. It is possible to impress the player that the speed is faster than the display speed of variable display in other presentation modes.

In the present embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when a pseudo variation of a decorative symbol (a "third decorative symbol" to be described later) during acceleration pseudo variation production is executed, a third When the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, the pedestal pattern and the number pattern are included, but the ray effect display is not included. At this time, the display colors of the third decorative pattern are displayed in each color (blue, red, and gold), and the display color inside the number pattern appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as "special mode" as appropriate). is displayed. In this way, when the third decorative pattern during the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not include the light effect display, while being displayed in a special mode, A player can be made aware that the currently executed variation is a pseudo variation.

Further, when the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect is completed and the variable display for notifying the display result of the variable display is executed, the currently executed fluctuation is simulated by not displaying the third decorative pattern in a special mode. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is not a variation, that is, it is a variation display of decorative symbols for notifying the actual display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing of the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state when the jackpot occurrence count value=3, the start of the "super-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (the start of the "plunge fluctuation"). The notifying characters “READY” are displayed on the image display device 5 .

<Production example of “Rush change out”>
9-6, and FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10 will be used to explain an example of the effect when the variation pattern is "running variation miss".

FIG. 9-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related when the variation pattern is "rush fluctuation is lost", and FIGS. ] is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the case of ".

First, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), at a predetermined timing of the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value=3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the Display the characters "READY".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 suggests mode start. An effect is executed, and characters of "super high speed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (3) to (7), the period from the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol to the timing when 17.5 seconds have passed ( In the period of T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 9-6 (7.5 seconds)), the production control CPU 120 executes the acceleration pseudo fluctuation production (first unit pseudo fluctuation), and the symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative pattern is executed. As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (3), (6) and (7), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start suggesting effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen. The characters of "super high speed HYPER RUSH" are images having a higher display priority than the third decorative pattern. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the characters "Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative pattern are displayed in that order.

At this time, the display mode of the characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" is lower in visibility than the display mode of the characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" displayed in the mode start notification effect after the end of the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect. It is displayed as it is. In this example, the characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" during the acceleration pseudo fluctuation production are displayed in a thin white character mode, while the "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" is displayed in dark black characters.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (8) to 9-8 (11), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, and the timing after 21 seconds has passed from the timing when 17.5 seconds have passed. (period of T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 9-6 (3.5 seconds)), the production control CPU 120 executes the acceleration pseudo fluctuation production (second unit pseudo fluctuation), and the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative symbol is executed. As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start suggesting effect and causes the image display device 5 to display the characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (12) onwards, the timing after 21 seconds have passed since the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-6), production control The CPU 120 executes acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effects (3rd to 8th unit pseudo-fluctuations), and executes pseudo-fluctuations of the third decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (13) to (15), the effect control CPU 120 executes the acceleration pseudo-variation effect (seventh unit pseudo-variation), and the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative symbol is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (16), at the timing when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-6), production control The CPU 120 ends the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, erases the third decoration pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the mode start notification effect, and returns to the center of the screen of the image display device 5. ``Super high speed HYPER RUSH'' (in the form of dark black characters) is displayed on the part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (17), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification effect, and the characters of "Super high speed HYPER RUSH rush" appear in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 ( dark black characters) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (18) to 9-10 (21), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, and the timing after 30.2 seconds has passed from the timing when 30 seconds have passed. In the period until (the period of T10 to T11 shown in FIG. 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode start notification effect, and from the center part of the screen of the image display device 5, the characters "Super high speed HYPER RUSH rush" is erased, and the variable display of the third decorative design is executed in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the combination of the finalized third decorative design that results in the display result being "lost" (in this example, " 145”) is stopped (stop display, fixed stop). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("145" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the third decorative symbol ( Stop display, fixed stop), the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special mode, but is displayed in a mode including light effect display. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-28, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when it is controlled to [super high speed HYPER RUSH], if the "normal small hit" is won with a small number of fluctuation display, the fluctuation display period is compared with other production modes is controlled to [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high rate of selecting an extremely short variation pattern ("ultra-high-speed failure" (0.2 seconds)). There is a risk that you will end without fully playing the [super high speed HYPER RUSH] that can be played.

In view of the occurrence of such a situation, in the first variation of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] that is controlled for the first time, the variation pattern of "Rush variation" (30 seconds or more) is executed at a rate of 100%. By doing so, even if the player falls from the [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, it is possible to ensure the control period of the [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] for at least 30 seconds or longer.

In addition, in the first variation of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which is controlled for the first time, the variation pattern (acceleration pseudo-variation effect) of "Rush variation" is executed at a rate of 100%, so that [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the pseudo-variation of the decorative symbols in a manner similar to the variable display of the third decorative symbol in [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is executed multiple times, so that although it is a pseudo-variation, It is possible to play the variable display of the third decorative pattern in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] at least a plurality of times.

Also, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the length of the jackpot ending period according to the number of occurrences of the jackpot. The jackpot ending period immediately before the jackpot is controlled) is set to 30 seconds, and during this period, information that suggests that it will be controlled for the first time after the jackpot HIGH SPEED HYPER RUSH”, ”Super high speed HYPER RUSH Rush”, etc.) can be displayed.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine, it is prohibited to perform variable display of decorative symbols during the jackpot game state (jackpot ending period) or to perform a similar effect mode. Therefore, during the jackpot ending period, although it is possible to display information suggesting that it will be controlled for the first time in [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is not possible to execute the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, and [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is not possible to inform the player that the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than the consumption speed of the variable display of the other production modes.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of information suggesting that the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect and [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] are controlled for the first time is the first fluctuation controlled to [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] instead of the jackpot ending period. running to

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
The variation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation failure" in this embodiment is that the unit pseudo fluctuation of the decorative pattern ("third decorative pattern" described later) is continuously executed three times, and displayed after the third unit pseudo fluctuation is completed. This is a variation pattern in which the variable display of the third decorative pattern for informing that the result is "lost" is executed, and the combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is "losing" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-12 and Figures 9-13). That is, it is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo variations and one variation display for notifying the display result of the variation display are executed. The effect in which the variable display is executed for notifying the display result of the variable display is referred to as "display result notification variable effect".

The pseudo-variation effect of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern of "pseudo-variation failure" in this embodiment means that the first unit pseudo-variation period, the second unit pseudo-variation period, and the third unit pseudo-variation period are all It is set to 700 ms, which is the period (200 ms) during which the decorative design undergoes pseudo-variation + the period (500 ms) during which the decorative design is temporarily stopped. That is, a configuration is adopted in which all three unit pseudo fluctuations are executed at the same speed (constant speed). Hereinafter, such a pseudo-fluctuation effect is appropriately referred to as a "constant-speed pseudo-fluctuation effect."

In this embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, when the pseudo-variation of the decorative symbols during the constant-speed pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, if the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped , a pedestal pattern, a number pattern, and a light effect display. At this time, the display colors of the third decorative pattern are displayed in each color (blue, red, and gold), and the display color inside the number pattern appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as "special mode" as appropriate). is displayed. In this way, when the third decorative symbol during the constant speed pseudo-fluctuation effect is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special mode, thereby indicating that the currently executed fluctuation is the pseudo-fluctuation. people can recognize it.

Further, when the constant speed pseudo-variation effect is completed and the variable display for notifying the display result of the variable display is executed, the currently executed fluctuation is not displayed in the special mode. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is not a pseudo-fluctuation.

<Example of “pseudo fluctuation deviation” effect>
9-11 and 9-12 to 9-13 will be used to explain an example of the effect when the variation pattern is "pseudo variation failure".

FIG. 9-11 is a time chart showing execution timings of respective effects related when the variation pattern is "pseudo-fluctuation failure", and FIGS. ] is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the case of ".

First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to (3), the period from the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to the timing when 0.7 seconds have passed (shown in FIG. 9-11 period of T1 to T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a constant speed pseudo-variation effect (first unit pseudo-variation), and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the third decorative symbol to perform a pseudo-variation of As shown in FIG. 9-12 (3), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-28, which will be described later).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (4) to (6), the period from the timing after 0.7 seconds to the timing after 1.4 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol ( In the period of T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 9-11), the production control CPU 120 executes a constant speed pseudo fluctuation production (second unit pseudo fluctuation), and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 In, pseudo-variation of the third decoration design is executed. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (6), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (7) to 9-13 (9), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, and the timing after 2.1 seconds has passed from the timing when 1.4 seconds have passed. In the period until (the period of T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 9-11), the production control CPU 120 executes the constant speed pseudo fluctuation production (third unit pseudo fluctuation), and the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 , 5C and 5R, the pseudo variation of the third decoration pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 9-13 (9), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-13 (10) to (13), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol from the timing when 2.1 seconds have passed to the timing when 2.8 seconds have passed. During the period (the period of T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the constant speed pseudo-fluctuation effect, and the third decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. The pseudo variation is terminated, the variable display of the third decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the combination of the finalized third decorative symbols (in this example, , "145") are stopped (stop display, fixed stop). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("145" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the third decorative symbol ( The third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special mode when the stop display, fixed stop).

[Direct hit]
In the present embodiment, when the big hit occurrence count value ≧ 3 a time-saving state (that is, "super-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or b time-saving state (that is, "invincible RUSH"), the second special symbol fluctuation display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern of "direct jackpot" is executed.

The "direct jackpot" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is hidden after the variable display is started, and the variable display is terminated while the decorative pattern remains hidden. In this variation pattern, when the variation display ends, the combination of small symbols indicating that the variation display result is a "big hit" is fixed and stopped (see FIGS. 9-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is equipped with a light emitting device, and when the big hit occurrence count value ≥ 3, a time saving state (that is, "super high speed HYPER RUSH") or b In a time-saving state (that is, "invincible RUSH"), when a big hit occurs based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", a special variable prize is won at the timing of being controlled to the big hit game state. It is possible to illuminate the ball device 7 .

<Example of direct hit>
An example of the effect when the variation pattern is "straight hit" will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-14.

FIGS. 9-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image of each effect associated when the variation pattern is the "straight hit".

First, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of the fixed third decoration symbol of the variable display executed immediately before ("245" in this example) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("245" in this example) is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-28, which will be described later).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2), the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the next second special symbol (the variation display corresponding to the first suspension memory among the four suspension memories) Then, the effect control CPU 120 erases the third decoration pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 which receives the symbol confirmation designation command erases the third decorative symbol. Then, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result will be a "jackpot" is confirmed and stopped (that is, the second 3 The pattern matching effect is not executed with respect to the decorative pattern). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the jackpot round game start image on the image display device 5. display. This jackpot round game start image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game, and the characters "Aim for the attacker!" It is an image including a jackpot right hitting promotion image including an arrow image for instructing hitting, and an ally character. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time-saving state, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special pattern is high, and there are many situations in which a big win occurs when the display result is determined as a ``minor win''. However, if the display result is determined to be a "jackpot" while the time-saving state is being controlled, the player feels disappointed that it would have been better to have won the prize in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, information indicating that a big hit has occurred because the display result is determined to be a "big hit" (characters of "Aim for the attacker!" Aim!!”)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light, thereby directing the player's consciousness from the image display device 5 toward the big winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment over the occurrence of a big hit by determining that the display result is a "big hit".

<Variation pattern with normal reach>
In the present embodiment, the variation pattern with normal reach (“high-speed normal reach miss”, “high-speed normal reach short time hit”, etc.) means that after the reach state is established, the super reach production (challenge production, fall production, etc.) will be performed. The final display result is fixed and stopped without being executed.

In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns with normal reach when the variation display result is "loss", the variation display period is 3000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "high-speed normal reach failure".

Further, among the variation patterns with normal reach when the variation display result is "time-saving small win", the variation display period is 7000 ms when the variation pattern is determined as "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win".

<Variation pattern with super reach>
In this embodiment, variation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach A lost", "super reach B lost", "super reach C lost", "super reach A short time hit", "super reach A big hit", " In Super Reach B normal small hit, Super Reach C time-saving small hit), super reach production is executed to inform whether or not the “big hit”, “time-saving small hit”, or “normal small win” is won. By doing so, the final display result is fixed and stopped.

(Super Reach A (Challenge Production))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach A miss", "super reach A short time small hit" and "super reach A big hit", the reach state is established at the start of the variable display. , a super reach A performance (hereinafter referred to as a ``challenge performance'' for informing whether or not a ``time-saving small win'' or a ``big hit'' has been won by an ally character performing an action of throwing a bomb against a rock. ) is executed. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (failure effect) in which the ally character fails the challenge is executed. In the failure effect, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display area. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "time-saving small hit" or a "big hit", an effect (success effect) that the ally character succeeds in the challenge is executed (see FIG. 9-58). In the failure effect, the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area (the matching pattern effect is executed).

(Super Reach B (Fall-inciting production))
In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns of "super reach B miss" and "super reach B normal small hit" among the variation patterns with super reach, when the variation display is started, a fall suggestion display (in this example, " !” and an image containing the letters “WARNING”) are displayed, a reach state is established, and a special pattern temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C (Suggesting that the time saving state will end A super reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as a “fall fanning effect” for notifying whether or not a “normal small win” is won by operating the push button 31B for a special pattern of the letters “END”). ) is executed. Here, when the final display result is "lost", the temporarily stopped special pattern is successfully destroyed, and an effect (fall avoidance effect) is executed in which the lost pattern is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5C. be done. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "normal small hit", the temporarily stopped special pattern fails to be destroyed, and the special pattern is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5C (Fall confirmation effect). Executed (see Figure 9-61).

(Super reach C (immediate button hit effect))
In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach C loss" and "super reach C short time hit", the reach is not established after the variable display is started, and the pattern display area An operation promotion display simulating the push button 31B and a time bar for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each area of 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the push button 31B is operated once. Each time, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in each pattern display area (for example, the pattern display areas 5R→5L→5C are stopped in order), and the push button 31B is operated three times in total to display the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A super reach C performance (hereinafter referred to as ``immediate button winning performance'') for informing whether or not a ``time-saving small winning'' is won is executed by stopping and displaying the combination of decoration symbols.

Here, when the final display result is "lost", the combination of decoration patterns (loose pattern) whose final display result is "loose" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (design is lost). production) is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is "time saving small hit", the combination of decorative patterns (7 odd number "777") in which the final display result is "time saving small hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. is executed (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example in which super reach A to super reach C are provided as types of super reach is shown, but the type of super reach is not limited to such a form, and a type different from super reach A to super reach C is used as the type of super reach. may have a super reach of

For example, assume that a super reach D is provided as a super reach. Among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach D miss", "super reach D short time small hit" and "super reach D big hit", the reach state is established with the start of the variable display, and the friendly character becomes the enemy. A super reach D effect (hereinafter referred to as a "battle effect" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "time-saving small win" or "big win" is won by battling with a character. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "shorter time win" or a "big hit", an effect (victory effect) is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character. It is assumed that the ally character appearing in this battle production is associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100, which will be described later.

Here, the variation pattern determination during Dream RUSH, super-fast HYPER RUSH, and invincible RUSH (see FIG. 9-25), which will be described later, will be described. Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result as a "jackpot" [For big hit] Variation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to do, and [For time-saving small hit] Used when it is predetermined to make the fluctuation display result "time-saving small hit" A variation pattern determination table and a [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a "normal small win" are prepared in advance.

[For loss] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, "long fluctuation loss", "high speed loss", "high speed normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", "super reach B loss", "super high speed loss", "super Predetermined random number values within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned as determination values to each of the variation patterns of reach C failure and rush variation failure.

[For jackpot] In the variation pattern determination table, for each variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", "rush variation jackpot", and "direct jackpot", out of the possible range of random number MR3 for variation pattern determination A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value.

[For short-time small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, "High-speed short-time small hits", "High-speed normal reach short-time small hits", "Super reach A short-time small hits", "Inrush fluctuation short-time small hits", "Super high-speed short-time small hits" A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of "hit" and "super reach C short time hit".

[For normal small hit] In the variation pattern determination table, for each variation pattern of "Super reach B normal small hit", "Rush fluctuation normal small hit", "High speed normal small hit" A predetermined random number within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

In the present embodiment, as the big hits, via a symbol big hit directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Since a big win via a small win generated by a V prize is included, different variation patterns are used depending on whether the display result is a "big win" or a "small win". However, it is not limited to such a form, and a common variation pattern may be used for the case where the display result is a "big win" and the case where the display result is a "minor win".

<For [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for 0 pending] variation pattern determination table>
9-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] [for 0 pending] in this embodiment . In addition, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=1, 2 in the a time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to "Dream RUSH" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIGS. 9-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (dream RUSH)] [for 0 pending] in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 700 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are the variation pattern 701 for “long variation failure”. Up to 800 is a "high speed loss" variation pattern, 801 to 900 is a "high speed normal reach loss" variation pattern, 901 to 950 is a "super reach A loss" variation pattern, 951 to 997 is a "super reach B" It is assigned to the variation pattern of “out of line”.

As shown in Figure 9-15 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are in the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit" assigned.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (3), in the [time-saving small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 300 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small hit" Patterns, 301 to 500 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "high speed normal reach short time small hit", and 501 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A short time small hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super reach B normal small hit" is assigned to a variation pattern of

<For [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for 1 to 4 pending] variation pattern judgment table>
9-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] [for 1 to 4 pending] in this embodiment is. That is, FIGS. 9-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [holding 1 to 4] for [a time saving state (dream RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (1), in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table, in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 800 are "high speed loss" variation patterns, 801 to 901 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "high speed normal reach failure", 951 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B failure".

As shown in Figure 9-16 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are in the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit" assigned.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (3), in the [time-saving small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 300 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small hit" Patterns, 301 to 500 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "high speed normal reach short time small hit", and 501 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A short time small hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super reach B normal small hit" is assigned to a variation pattern of

<For [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st variation] variation pattern determination table>
FIGS. 9-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [1st variation] for [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value=3)] in the present embodiment. In addition, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=3 in the a time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to "super high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIGS. 9-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table of [for the first variation of the a time-saving state (super high speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first hit] in this embodiment. is.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), in the [for failure] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "rush variation failure" It is

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "rush variation big hit" It is

As shown in Figure 9-17 (3), [for short time small hit] In the variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "rush fluctuation short time small hit" assigned to a variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "rush fluctuation normal small hit" assigned to a variation pattern.

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [0 pending]] variation pattern determination table>
9-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] [for 0 pending] in this embodiment . In addition, when the big hit occurrence count value=3, the first variation is excluded. In addition, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=3 to 10000 in the a time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to "super high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIGS. 9-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH)] [for 0 pending] in this embodiment (big hit If the occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded).

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), in the [for failure] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 700 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "pseudo variation failure" 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super high speed loss", 901 to 950 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C loss", and 951 to 997 are assigned to "super It is assigned to the variation pattern of “Reach B out of reach”.

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "direct jackpot". ing.

As shown in Figure 9-18 (3), in the [time-saving small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 700 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super high speed time-saving small hit" It is assigned to the variation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C short time hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super reach B normal small hit" is assigned to a variation pattern of

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [holding 1 to 4 pieces]] variation pattern determination table>
9-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] [for 1 to 4 pending] in this embodiment is. In addition, when the big hit occurrence count value=3, the first variation is excluded. In addition, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=3 to 10000 in the a time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to "super high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIGS. 9-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] [for 1 to 4 pending] in this embodiment. (In the case of jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded).

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), in the [loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 900 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super high speed failure" 901 to 975 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C failure", and 976 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach B failure".

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "direct jackpot". ing.

As shown in Figure 9-19 (3), in the [time saving small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 700 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super high speed time saving small hit" It is assigned to the variation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C short time hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "super reach B normal small hit" is assigned to a variation pattern of

<[b time saving state] fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIGS. 9-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [b time saving state] in the present embodiment. In addition, in this example, when it is in the b time saving state, it is controlled to "invincible RUSH" as the production mode (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIGS. 9-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [b time saving state (invincible RUSH)] in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (1), in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the "high speed loss" variation pattern. ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "direct jackpot". ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (3), in the [time-saving small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small hit" assigned to the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (4), in the [normal small hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are fluctuations of "high speed normal small hit" assigned to the pattern.

In this way, during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, if the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 (more than the mode switching judgment value), the fluctuation display period is shorter than 1000ms "Super high speed non-reach About 80% of the time, the rate of execution of the variation pattern of "out of line" is about 80%. On the other hand, when the hit occurrence count value = 1, 2 (less than the mode switching judgment value), the rate of execution of the variation pattern of "super high speed non-reach out" whose variation display period is shorter than 1000 ms is 0%. . Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3", the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000ms is more likely than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3". Higher execution rate.

[Control table after winning by game state]
FIG. 9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a post-win control table for each game state in this embodiment. FIG. 9-21 (1) shows the game state to be controlled after winning when the display result is "jackpot" when the game state is the normal state, according to each display result (jackpot type). there is In addition, FIG. 9-21 (2) shows the game state to be controlled after hitting when the display result is "small hit" when the game state is a time saving state, each display result (small hit type) and the presence or absence of V winning. In addition, FIG. 9-21 (3) shows the game state to be controlled after hitting when the display result is "small hit" when the game state is b time saving state, each display result (small hit type) and the presence or absence of V winning.

As shown in FIG. 9-21 (1), when the game state is normal,
(No. 1-1) When the display result is "symbol 3R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to the normal state after the jackpot.
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "symbol 10Ra time saving big hit", it is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit,
(No. 1-3) When the display result is "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit", control is made to b time-saving state after the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 9-21 (2), when the game state is a time saving state,
(No. 2-1) If the display result is "normal small win" and no V winning occurs during the small win, control is made to the normal state after the small win,
(No. 2-2) If the display result is a "normal small win" and a V win occurs during the small win, control is made to the normal state after the big win via the small win,
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "time-saving small win" and V winning does not occur during the small win, the normal state is controlled after the small win.
(No. 2-4) If the display result is "time saving small win" and V winning occurs during the small win, control is made to the time saving state a after the big win via the small win.

As shown in FIG. 9-21 (3), when the game state is b time saving state,
(No. 3-1) If the display result is "normal small win" and V winning does not occur during the small win, it is controlled to the b time saving state after the small win,
(No. 3-2) If the display result is a "normal small win" and a V prize occurs during the small win, control is made to the normal state after the big win via the small win,
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "time-saving small win" and V winning does not occur during the small win, the normal state is controlled after the small win.
(No. 3-4) If the display result is "time saving small win" and V winning occurs during the small win, control is made to the time saving state a after the big win via the small win.

In this way, when the gaming state is the time-saving state, (No. 2-1) the display result becomes "normal small win", and if V winning does not occur during the small win, the small win While it is controlled to the normal state later, when the gaming state is the b time saving state, (No. 3-1) the display result is "normal small win", and V winning did not occur during the small win In the case, it is controlled to the b time saving state after the small hit.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 9-22 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing (S113) in special symbol process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the big hit flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and in the special symbol normal processing (S110) of FIG. is set to the ON state based on On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off based on the stop display of the big hit symbol as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

When the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the waiting time for the jackpot start effect (step S02TM1020), and advances the process to step S02TM1030. In the process of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win is set in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step S02TM1040), and proceeds to step S02TM1050. proceed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state, and is an effect control command supplied from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. include. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data are set according to the variable display result and the decision result of the jackpot type. In the process of step S02TM1030, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. be done.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S114) ( Step S02TM1060), the process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data is the stored value of the jackpot occurrence counter. The big win occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of times determined to control to the big win in the game state including the first big win that triggered the control to the big win game state so as to be identifiable.

In this example, the initial count value of "0" is set in the big win generation counter as an initial state, and every time it is determined to control to a big win including the first big win that triggered the control to the big win game state. 1 is added to the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a stored value, for updating. Then, when the number of times determined to be controlled to a big hit including the first big win that triggered the control to the big win game state reaches a limit value (10000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit value (limit When reaching: jackpot occurrence count value=10000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0". Thereafter, until the limit value is reached again, "1" is added to the big win generation count value each time it is determined to control the big win including the first big win.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of updating by adding 1 to the count value of big hit occurrence has been shown.

For example, an initial count value of ``10000'' is set in the jackpot occurrence counter as an initial state, and each time it is determined to control to a jackpot including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot game state, It is updated by subtracting "1" from the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a stored value. Then, when the number of times determined to be controlled to a big hit including the first big win that triggered the control to the big win game state reaches a limit value (10000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit value (limit When reaching: jackpot occurrence count value=0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10000". After that, until the limit value is reached again, "1" is subtracted from the big win occurrence count value each time it is determined to control the big win including the first big win.

Further, when the big hit flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small hit flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and in the special symbol normal processing (S110) of FIG. It is set to ON based on what has been determined. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off based on the stop display of the small winning symbol as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

When the small hit flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step S02TM1210), and ends the process as it is. do.

When the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets waiting for effect at start of small win (step S02TM1120), and advances the process to step S02TM1130. In the processing of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit is set in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a small hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small win flag to turn it off (step S02TM1140), and performs a special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and the processing is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, the small hit start designation command is a command (small hit fanfare command) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the small win game state, and the effect supplied from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Included in control commands. In the small hit start designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variable display result and the determination result of the small hit type. In the process of step S02TM1130, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the small-hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the small-hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. stored in

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 9-23 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S117) in the special symbol process process.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot has passed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" in the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) of FIG. Is set to the game control process timer. In the process of step S02TM2010, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and the updated game control process timer value is a predetermined waiting time elapse determination value (in this embodiment, "0"), it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big win has passed.

When the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

When the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot has passed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines that the jackpot occurrence count value corresponds to a limit value (10000 times in this example) as a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not a limit reaching determination value (“10000” in this example) as a predetermined specific value has been reached (step S02TM2020).

When the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching determination value (“10000” in this example) (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter and stores the value of the jackpot occurrence. The count value is initialized to "0" (step S02TM2030), and the process proceeds to step S02TM2110.

When the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit reach determination value (“10000” in this example) (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via a small hit. is determined (step S02TM2040).

In the processing of step S02TM2040, the data indicating the type of the jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot via the jackpot. In this example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is either "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" or "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win".

In the processing of step S02TM2040, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via a small hit (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot is a "normal jackpot". is determined (step S02TM2050).

When the small win type corresponding to the big win is "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the big win occurrence counter and initializes the big win occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100). ), the process proceeds to step S02TM2110.

When the small win type corresponding to the big win is not the "normal small win" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM2060.

In the process of step S02TM2040, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a jackpot via a small hit (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080). ).

If the jackpot type is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and proceeds to step S02TM2110. Proceed with processing.

If the jackpot type is not "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM2060.

When it is determined to be NO in step S02TM2050 or when it is determined to be NO in step S02TM2080, the CPU 103 sets a time saving flag corresponding to the jackpot type (step S02TM2060), and sets the time saving counter to "10000". ” is set as the count initial value (step S02TM2070), and the process proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, when one of the conditions for being controlled to a time saving state is satisfied, a time saving flag can be set. The time saving flag includes an a time saving flag and a b time saving flag. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The a time-saving flag is the "symbol 10Ra time-saving big hit" that occurred during the normal state, the "time-saving small hit via 10Ra time-saving big hit" that occurred during the time-saving state, or the "time-saving small hit via 10Ra time-saving" that occurred during the time-saving state. It is set when it is controlled to the a time saving state after any one of the big hits. This a time saving flag is set when the big hit game state ends, and when the a time saving state ends (the timing of the big hit during the a time saving state, the time saving control of the specified number of times (10000 times) ends and normal state-controlled timing, etc.).

The b time saving flag is set when it is controlled to the b time saving state after the big hit of the "symbol 10Rb time saving big hit" that occurred during the normal state. This b time saving flag is set when the big hit game state ends, and when the b time saving state ends (when the b time saving state hits the jackpot, the time saving control of the specified number of times (10000 times) ends and normal state-controlled timing, etc.).

After the process of step S02TM2030, after the process of step S02TM2070, after the process of step S02TM2090, or after the process of step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol normal process (S110). The corresponding value is updated (step S02TM2110), and the process ends.

In this way, even in the irregular case where V winning occurs in the "normal small hit" and is controlled to the big win game state, in the big win end process, it is determined as YES in step S02TM2050, and the time saving flag is generated. (step S02TM2060), it is possible to control to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state after the big hit game state.

In addition, when it is judged as YES in step S02TM2080 and the process (step S02TM2090) of clearing the big hit generation counter is executed, when the "symbol 3R normal big hit" occurs in the normal state, after the end of the big hit Since it is controlled to the normal state, the big win occurrence count value is initialized when the big win ends. In addition, when it is determined to be YES in step S02TM2050 and the process of clearing the big hit occurrence counter (step S02TM2100) is executed, if "10 Ra big hit via normal small hit" occurs, normal Since it is controlled by the state, the big win occurrence count value is initialized when the big win ends.

[Small hit end processing]
FIG. 9-24 is a flow chart showing a small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (step S02TM3010), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (step S02TM3020).

When the V winning valid period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag, which is set when the V winning is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3030).

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 ends the process.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether a V winning caused by a game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period has been detected. In order to determine whether or not, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the ON state (step S02TM3040).

If the V winning switch is not on (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the process.

On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 indicates that the V winning has been detected during the V winning effective period, and that the V winning has been detected. A V prize flag is set (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for transmitting the V winning designation command (step S02TM3060), and terminates the processing as it is. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command (step S02TM3070). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 changes the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and perform control to return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S02TM3090).

When the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines a big win and sets the big win flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is decided that the jackpot will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally stored (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and once resets the time saving flag set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In the above-described embodiment, in the small-hit end processing executed at the timing when the small-hit game state ends, when V winning occurs, the big-hit occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data is added by 1. Although an example in which the update process (step S02TM3120) is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and in the small hit open process executed when it is controlled to the small hit game state, V winning has occurred, a process of updating by adding 1 to the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data may be executed.

Also, in the above embodiment, an example of updating the big hit count value by adding 1 was shown, but the invention is not limited to such a form, and the big win count value may be updated by subtracting 1. Since it can be realized by a method similar to the method shown at step S02TM1050, the explanation is omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5) to the jackpot control timer (step S02TM3150).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, and according to the jackpot type, the number of openings (eg, 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval time The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as (large winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (step S02TM3160). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM3170), and ends the process as it is. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

When the V winning flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether or not b of the time saving flags is set (step S02TM3180).

If the b time saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM3200. As a result, when the b time saving flag is not set, that is, when no V prize is generated in the small hit occurring during the a time saving state or during the normal state, the processing after step S02TM3200 is executed. .

On the other hand, when the b time saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit type of the small win is "normal small win" (step S02TM3190).

If the minor win type of the minor win is "normal minor win" (YES in step S02TM3190), CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM3200. As a result, when the b time saving flag is set and the V prize is not generated in the small hit whose small hit type is "time saving small win", that is, when the time saving small win occurred during the b time saving state does not occur, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards is executed.

When it is determined as NO in step S02TM3180 or when it is determined as NO in step S02TM3190, the CPU 103 once resets the time saving flag set at that time (step S02TM3200) and clears the time saving number counter. , the time-saving frequency count value is initialized to "0" (S02TM3210), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared, the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0" (step S02TM3220), and the process proceeds to step S02TM3230.

When it is determined as YES in step S02TM3190, or after the processing of step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the jackpot via the jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step S02TM3240), and the process is terminated as it is. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

In this way, when the V winning flag is not set, the b time saving flag is set, and the small hit type is "normal small hit" (YES in step 02TM3180 → YES in step S02TM3190), By skipping a series of processes from step S02TM3200 to step S02TM3210 for resetting the time saving flag and clearing the time saving number counter when V winning is not made in the normal small hit that occurred during the b time saving state, the b time saving state If it is medium, even if a normal small hit occurs, it is possible to continue the control of the b time saving state without being controlled to the normal state (falling).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the effect mode when the first flag, second flag, and third flag described later are not set is [Normal mode ], the gaming state is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or normal state (low probability / low base state), and when the first flag described later is set The production mode is set to [Dream RUSH], and the gaming state is controlled to either b time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or normal state (low probability / low base state), and the second flag described later The production mode when set is [Invincible RUSH], and the game state is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or normal state (low probability / low base state), The effect mode when the third flag, which will be described later, is set is [super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-25).

In the example of the game flow shown in FIG. 9-25, a jackpot occurs when the production mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state is completed, control is performed to either the normal state, the time saving state, or the time saving state b. When it is controlled to the normal state, it shifts to [normal mode], when it is controlled to a time saving state, it shifts to [Dream RUSH], When it is controlled to b time saving state, Switch to [Invincible RUSH].

In this game flow, description of irregular situations during the game is omitted. As an example of an irregular situation during play,
・Situation where a big hit or small hit occurred with special figure 2 during normal state ・Situation where V prize was won with a small hit that occurred during normal condition Situation where V was won in the small hit ・Situation where V was not won in the time-saving small win ・Situation where the display result is “lost” in all 10,000 time-saving fluctuation displays There is These specific examples of irregular situations are only examples, and other situations not described here are also included.

(1) <Normal times>
The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [Normal mode ].

(2) <first hit>
In the above-described state (1), when a variable display is executed in which the display result is "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state. In this embodiment, there are (2A) "symbol 3R normal jackpot", (2B) "symbol 3Ra short-time jackpot", and (2C) "symbol 10Rb short-time jackpot" as the jackpot types of the first special pattern.

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" is completed, the state (1) is established.

(2B) → (3)
When the big win in the case where the big win type is "symbol 3Ra time saving big win" is completed, the state is controlled to (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot when the jackpot type is "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" ends, the state is controlled to (4).

(3) <a time saving 10000 times>
The effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode when the game state is controlled to the a time saving state (low probability/high base state), the first flag is set, and 10000 times of variable display is executed. ].

(4) <10,000 b time reduction>
The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode when the game state is controlled to the b time saving state (low probability/high base state), the second flag is set, and 10000 times of variable display is executed. ].

(5) <jackpot>
In the state of (3) or (4) described above, or in the state of (7) described later, when the display result becomes "big hit" or "time-saving small hit" in any of the variable displays, the big hit game state (via small hit including jackpot gaming state). In the present embodiment, there is a "symbol 10Ra time-saving big hit" as the big hit type of the second special symbol when the display result is "big hit", and the second special symbol when the display result is "time-saving small hit". There is a "10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small-hit" as a kind of big hit via small-hit.

(5) → (3)
When the big win is completed when the number of occurrences of the big win is "2", the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the number of occurrences of the big win is "3" or more ("3" to "10000"), the game is controlled to the state of (7).

(7) <a time saving 10000 times>
The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode when the game state is controlled to a short time state (low probability / high base state), the third flag is set, and 10000 times of variable display is executed. HYPER RUSH].

(6) <Falling small hit>
In the state (3) or (7) described above, when the display result becomes "normal small hit" in any of the variable displays, the game is controlled to the small win game state. In this embodiment, in the small winning game when the display result is "normal jackpot", the opening pattern of the V judgment winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and the game ball wins the V judgment winning device 87. It is extremely difficult to make it happen, and it is practically impossible to generate a big hit.

(6) → (1)
When the small win type is "normal small win" and the small win ends without the occurrence of the V prize, the state (1) is controlled.

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, second flag, and third flag in this embodiment will be described.

<First flag>
It is assumed that after the end of the jackpot, a type of jackpot ("symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", "a time-saving jackpot via a short-time jackpot", etc.) to be controlled to the "a" time-saving state occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the end of the big win game state, when the big win occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the time saving state a, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

After the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, until the 10000th variable display in which the display result is "lost" is completed, a big win (including a big win via a small win) is made in any one of the variable displays. is generated, and when the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the first flag.

Also, when the 10000th fluctuation display in which the display result is "missing" after the game state is controlled to the time saving state a (low probability / high base state), the game state is changed to the normal state (low probability / low base state ). The variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10000th variable display is executed. A big hit (including a big hit via a small win) occurs in any one of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), and is controlled to a big win gaming state, or during the period In all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), when the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second flag>
After the end of the big hit, it is assumed that a big hit of a type controlled to the b time saving state ("symbol 10Rb time saving big hit", etc.) occurs and is controlled to the big hit game state. When the game state is controlled to the b time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

After the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state b, until the 10000th variation display in which the display result is "lost" is completed, a big win (including a big win via a small win) is made in any one of the variable displays. occurs, and when the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the second flag.

Also, when the 10000th variable display with the display result of "loss" after the game state is controlled to the b time saving state is completed, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). The variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10000th variable display is executed. A big hit (including a big hit via a small win) occurs in any one of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), and is controlled to a big win gaming state, or during the period In all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), when the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<Third flag>
After the end of the big hit, it is assumed that the type of jackpot controlled to the a time saving state (“time saving small hit via a time saving big hit” etc.) occurs and the big hit game state is controlled. In addition, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the end of the big win game state, when the big win occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the time saving state a, the effect control CPU 120 sets the third flag.

After the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, until the 10000th variable display in which the display result is "lost" is completed, a big win (including a big win via a small win) is made in any one of the variable displays. is generated, and when the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the third flag.

Also, when the 10000th fluctuation display in which the display result is "missing" after the game state is controlled to the time saving state a (low probability / high base state), the game state is changed to the normal state (low probability / low base state ). The variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10000th variable display is executed. A big hit (including a big hit via a small win) occurs in any one of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), and is controlled to a big win gaming state, or during the period In all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum four in this example), when the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Direction mode]
As shown in FIG. 9-25, in this example, [Normal mode], [Dream RUSH], [Invincible RUSH], and [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] are provided as production modes. [Dream RUSH], [Invincible RUSH], and [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] among the presentation modes in this embodiment will be described below.

<Dream RUSH>
In the present embodiment, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state or normal state, and the production mode when the first flag is set is [Dream RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as "[Dream RUSH] mode" as appropriate.) (See Figure 9-25 (3)). FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is [Dream RUSH].

As shown in FIGS. 9-26 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first logo ( In this example, characters of "Dream RUSH") are displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always-right-handed promotion image is an image containing characters of "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to enter the second start winning slot.

(Variable display of decorative patterns in [Dream RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decoration pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH] is composed of number patterns indicating numbers, etc., and blue even number patterns (numbers "2", "4", "6" corresponding to ), a red odd number pattern excluding the number "7" (number patterns corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5"), and a gold odd number pattern of the number "7" (number "7" It consists of a number pattern corresponding to ). Below, the decoration design in case production mode is [dream RUSH] is suitably called "the 1st decoration design." The first decoration pattern may be composed of a number pattern and a pedestal pattern, which will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the first decoration pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH] is displayed by vertically scrolling the first decoration pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Vertical scroll display is scroll display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scroll display is being executed, the visibility of the decoration pattern is remarkably lowered, and in this example, it is substantially impossible to visually recognize the decoration pattern.

Also, when the variable display of the first decorative pattern is executed in the case where the production mode is [Dream RUSH], the size of the first decorative pattern does not change between when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation ends. and

(Example of variable display of decorative patterns in [Dream RUSH])
As shown in FIG. 9-26 (1), the effect control CPU 120 controls the combination of the fixed first decorative symbols of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "245 ”) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("245" in this example) is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays one second reserved display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area 02TM02E, and responds to the fact that the active display area 02TM03E is not currently being subjected to variable display. and the active display 02TM03 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the variable pattern designation command. Based on the variation pattern, the variation display of the first decorative design is started in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (3), at the timing when the first decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to The combination of the first decorative symbols ("412" in this example) that gives the display result of "missing" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the first fixed decorative symbols ("412" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("412" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream RUSH])
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a first logo cycle change effect that emphasizes the name of the effect mode currently being controlled by changing the first logo display at a predetermined cycle. The first logo period change effect is a effect of changing the display of the first logo in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the first logo period change effect, the first logo display (characters of "Dream RUSH") is displayed at a predetermined period. to emit light from the left end to the right end. The change cycle of the first logo cycle change effect is set to 5 seconds. By making the first logo display light up from the left end to the right end in this way, during [Dream RUSH], as well as improving the interest in the performance, it suggests right-handed shots for winning the second start winning slot. are doing.

(First system display in [Dream RUSH])
In the above-described embodiment, when the [Dream RUSH] is controlled, as the promotion image for winning the second start prize hole, the right-handed promotion image ("right-handed ” and an arrow image) is shown, but not limited to such a form, when it is controlled to [Dream RUSH], as a promotion image for winning the second start winning opening, An image different from the right-handed hitting promotion image may be always displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

For example, when it is controlled to [Dream RUSH], the first system display may be displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for making the player win the second starting prize opening. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image for making the player enter the second starting winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The cycle interval of the operation of the first system display is set to 3 seconds, for example.

(Display corresponding to the first rotation in [Dream RUSH])
In the above embodiment, when the [Dream RUSH] is controlled, the second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved storage number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular objects. Although an example is shown in which a still image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the number of second pending memories is executed The active display corresponding to the dynamic display may be displayed in a display mode different from the still image of the round object.

For example, when it is controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved storage number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular objects that rotate. may be displayed as a moving image. The second pending display and the active display performing the rotating operation at this time are referred to as the first rotation corresponding display. The rotation cycle of this first rotation correspondence display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

<Invincible RUSH>
In the present embodiment, the game state is controlled to the b time saving state or normal state, and the production mode when the second flag is set is [Invincible RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as "[Invincible RUSH] mode" as appropriate.) (See Figure 9-25 (4)).

Based on the fact that the effect mode is [Invincible RUSH], the effect control CPU 120 displays a telop display including characters "Congratulations" in the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 ([Invincible RUSH] background image). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always-right-handed promotion image is an image containing characters of "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to enter the second start winning slot.

(Variable display of decorative patterns in [Invincible RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decoration pattern when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] is composed of the same number patterns as the decoration pattern when the production mode is [DREAM RUSH]. However, the decorative pattern when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] is displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 in a manner smaller than the decorative pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH]. (See Figures 9-55 and 9-56). Below, the decoration design in case production mode is [invincible RUSH] is suitably called a "2nd decoration design."

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second decorative pattern when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] is the same as the variable display of the first decorative pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH]. In the two-symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, the second decorative patterns are vertically scroll-displayed. It should be noted that the variable display of the second decorative design when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] is such that the second decorative design is updated and displayed in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2, or the second decorative design is deformed. or enlarged/reduced.

<Ultra-fast HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the time saving state or normal state, and the effect mode when the third flag is set is [super high speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as “[super high speed HYPER RUSH] mode” as appropriate) (refer to Fig. 9-25 (7)). FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is [Super high speed HYPER RUSH].

As shown in FIGS. 9-28 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second logo on the upper center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the effect mode being [Super high speed HYPER RUSH]. A display (in this example, characters of "super high speed HYPER RUSH") is displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always-right-handed promotion image is an image containing characters of "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to enter the second start winning slot.

(Variable display of decorative patterns in [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decoration pattern when the production mode is [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is composed of a number pattern representing a number or the like and a pedestal pattern corresponding to the shape of this number pattern. In addition, among the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern in the center (design display area 5C) is between the pedestal pattern and the number pattern (in this example, the back of the center of the number pattern). , the light effect display is displayed from to the screen frame. The ray effect display is an image with a higher display priority than the pedestal design. Also, the number pattern is an image with a higher display priority than the light effect display. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the numerical symbols, the ray effect display, and the pedestal symbols are displayed in this order. Below, the decoration design in case production mode is [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is suitably called a "3rd decoration design."

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display of the third decorative pattern when the production mode is [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] enlarges/reduces the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decoration pattern is executed in the order of (1)→(2)→(3) shown below.

(1) When the variable display starts, the third decoration pattern, which has been fixed and stopped corresponding to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before, is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter referred to as , The third decorative design at this time is appropriately referred to as "third decorative design (size: large)".). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is lowered, and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced by changing the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white. . In addition, by adopting a configuration that can change the transmittance of the third decorative pattern, and setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the third decorative pattern The visibility of the pattern may be reduced.

(2) Next, the third decorative design that was enlarged and displayed immediately before is displayed in reduced size in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative design at this time will be referred to as "third decorative design (size : small)”). The combination of the third decoration symbols at this time is the combination of the third decoration symbols corresponding to the display result of the variable display. In addition, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is lowered, and the light effect display is erased, similarly to the enlarged display of the third decorative pattern. In this example, when the third decorative design is displayed in a reduced size, by changing the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative design to white and reducing the size of the third decorative design, The visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern in this way, even in the state of (2) in which the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed, the player is able to control the timing. , it becomes difficult to recognize the display result of the variable display.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was displayed in a reduced size immediately before is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as "third decorative pattern (size : medium)”). At this time, the visibility of the third decoration pattern is improved, and the ray effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved by changing the display color of the third decorative pattern from white to each color (blue, red, gold). ing.

In this example, when the enlarged display/reduced display is executed, the display size and display color of the decorative pattern are less visible, but the decorative pattern can still be visually recognized.

(Example of display of variable display of decorative patterns in [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in FIG. 9-28 (1), the effect control CPU 120 controls the combination of the determined third decorative symbols of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "245 ”) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("245" in this example) is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays one second reserved display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area 02TM02E, and responds to the fact that the active display area 02TM03E is not currently being subjected to variable display. and the active display 02TM03 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the variable pattern designation command. Based on the variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display color (blue, red, and gold) of the third decoration pattern to white, and erases the ray effect display. The combination of the third decoration symbols at this time is the combination of the third decoration symbols ("245" in this example) corresponding to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before ("lost" in this example). be.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28(3), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols ("412" in this example) corresponding to the display result of the variable display ("missing" in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols ("412" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("412" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("412" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-26(2), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [DREAM RUSH], during the period from the start to the end of the variable display, the decorative symbols There are times when it becomes invisible. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (2) to (5), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in [Super high speed HYPER RUSH], the period from the start to the end of the variable display , there is no timing when the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and it is possible to visually recognize it at any timing.

(Second logo display in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a second logo period change effect that emphasizes the name of the effect mode currently being controlled by changing the second logo display at a predetermined cycle. The second logo period change effect is a effect of changing the display of the second logo in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the second logo period change effect, the second logo display (characters of "super high speed HYPER RUSH") is displayed at a predetermined period, and the second logo is displayed. Light is emitted from the left end of the logo display toward the right end. The change cycle of the second logo cycle change effect is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by making the second logo display light up from the left end to the right end, during [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the attraction of the performance is improved, and the right hitting for winning the second starting prize opening is achieved. It suggests.

(Second system display in [Super high speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, when it is controlled to [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], as the promotion image for winning the second start prize hole, the right-handed promotion image (" Although an example of displaying "Right shot" characters and an arrow image) is shown, it is not limited to such a form. As the promotion image, an image different from the right-hand hitting promotion image may be always displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

For example, when it is controlled to [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second system display may be displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for making the player enter the second starting prize-winning slot. The second system display is a moving image including the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image for making the player enter the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The cycle interval of the operation of the second system display is set to 0.3 seconds, for example.

(Display corresponding to the second rotation in [Super high speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above-described embodiment, when the [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved storage number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular. Although an example of displaying a static image of an object has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is controlled to [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories and , and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display mode different from the still image of the round object.

For example, when it is controlled to [Super high speed HYPER RUSH], the second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular shapes that rotate. may be displayed as a moving image of the object. The second pending display and the active display performing the rotating operation at this time are referred to as the second rotation corresponding display. The rotation cycle of this second rotation correspondence display is set to 0.3 seconds, for example.

[accessories]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is an accessory, is provided in the vicinity (upper part) of the image display device 5 . Movable body 02TM100, according to the control of the effect control board 12, between the initial position, the intermediate effect position (the position where a part of the movable body is exposed), and the maximum effect position (the position where the whole movable body is exposed) Operate. Hereinafter, the intermediate effect position and the maximum effect position are appropriately referred to as "effect position".

For example, the movable body 02TM100 operates in the order of initial position→intermediate effect position→initial position, initial position→maximum effect position→initial position, or initial position→intermediate effect position→maximum effect position→initial position. Alternatively, the maximum effect position→intermediate effect position→initial position may be performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the movable body 02TM100 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5 when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position. That is, in the present embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and does not affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It's becoming

On the other hand, the movable body 02TM100 moves in front of the image display device 5 in the process of moving the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the rendering position (intermediate rendering position, maximum rendering position) or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the rendering position. It is located. That is, in the present embodiment, in the process of moving the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the effect position, and when the movable body 02TM100 is in the effect position, the area of the image display device 5 is overlapped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It has a configuration that affects the visibility of the image that is displayed. In this example, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate effect position when the first change effect described later is executed, and the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum effect position when the second change effect described later is executed. It shall be. In the following, an effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position→intermediate effect position→initial position is appropriately referred to as "intermediate action effect", and the movable body 02TM100 operates in the order of initial position→maximum effect position→initial position. The production is appropriately referred to as "maximum action production".

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape including a design imitating an ally character. The friendly character of this movable body 02TM100 is a common character with the friendly character that appears in the super reach performance (super reach A performance in this example).

In addition, a movable body LED is provided on the movable body 02TM100, and when the movable body moves from the initial position to the production position, or at a predetermined timing (for example, timing when the push button 31B is operated) when the production position is reached, the movable body It is also possible to adopt a configuration capable of executing a light emission effect in which the LED emits white light. In addition, a plurality of types of different effects may be provided as the mode of the light emission effect. For example, in addition to the rendering mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may be a rendering mode in which red light is emitted.

[Logo panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (upper) the image display device 5 . It is assumed that the characters "XXX" (the name of the game machine, etc.) are displayed on this logo panel, and the characters "XXX" on the logo panel emit light.

<Positional relationship between character and logo panel>
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the movable body 02TM100. As shown in FIG. 9-29(1), when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located behind the logo panel 02TM110 (on the side of the game machine). Visibility is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate effect position, part of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, about two-thirds of the bottom of the movable body) is the logo. Since it is located below the area where the panel 02TM110 is arranged, it is visible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is at the maximum rendering position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is provided with the logo panel 02TM110. Since it is positioned below the area where it is located, it is visible to the player.

Thus, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate effect position, only a part of the teammate character in the movable body is visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the maximum effect position, all of the friendly characters in the movable body are visible to the player.

[Change effect]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is a blue mode (this In this example, it is an example of an advance notice effect displayed in either a blue form) or a red mode (in this example, a red form).

Specifically, among the change effects, the execution of the hold change effect of displaying the display mode of the hold display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either the blue mode or the red mode) is suspended. It is a pre-reading preview effect that suggests the display result of the reserved memory. In addition, among the change effects, the active change effect of displaying the display mode of the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either the display mode of the blue mode or the red mode) is the display result of the currently executed variable display. It is a notice production during fluctuations that suggests. The timing of executing the change effect and the change pattern of the pending display will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-39 (B1) to 9-40 (B4). Further, in the present embodiment, as the changing effects, a first changing effect, a second changing effect, and a third changing effect having different effects modes can be executed.

<First change effect>
The first change effect is a series of effects composed of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) Change sign effect in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as “wavy effect display” as appropriate) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (1B) Movable body 02TM100 at initial position→intermediate effect position→initial (1C) Character appearance effect in which a character related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (1D) Friendly character corresponding display (active display, 1st effect change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display by throwing one bomb against the holding display)

In (1D), an effect in which a friendly character throws one bomb against a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as a "first action effect". The effect of changing the display mode is called "first corresponding display change effect".

In the present embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38) described later and the effect mode determination table (see FIG. 9-41) of the change effect described later, the first special When the variable display corresponding to the pattern is executed, the first change performance can be executed, and when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed, the first change performance is executed. It adopts a configuration that cannot

In this embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed is mainly the variation display of the first special symbol. There are more variation patterns with shorter variation display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state, and it is difficult to secure the period for executing the first variation performance in the time saving state, so the second special. A configuration is adopted in which the first change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the pattern is executed.

However, without being limited to such a form, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a configuration in which the first change effect cannot be executed may be adopted, and the second special symbol may be supported. A configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when the variable display is executed. For example, when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, in the case of adopting the configuration capable of executing the first change production, in order to secure the period for executing the first change production. , the first change effect may be executed over a plurality of times of change display.

In the above-described embodiment, after the pre-change effect is executed, the intermediate action effect, the character appearance effect, and the first effect change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, not limited to such a form, after the change precursor effect is executed, the intermediate action effect, the character appearance effect, and the first effect change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. There may be cases where it is not.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), only the change portent effect is executed, and the effect after the intermediate action effect of the first change effect is not executed. A process for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed. At this time, it is decided to execute the false change portent effect at a rate of 3%, and not to execute the false change portent effect at a rate of 97%.

(Production example of the first change production)
FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the first change effect. This example shows an example in which the first change effect is executed while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), at the timing when one second has passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first change effect (1A). A change portent effect is executed, and a wavy effect display 02TM200 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 at the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change portent effect of the first change effect, and erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1B) intermediate action effect of the first change effect is executed, and the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate effect position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action effect of the first change effect, and erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1C) character appearance effect of the first change effect is executed, and the ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. similar ally character) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate effect position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (5), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance effect of the first change effect, and erases the teammate character 02TM30B from the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1D) first action change effect of the first change effect is executed, and a friend character 02TM30C that throws one bomb against the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the (1D) first effect change effect of the first change effect, The character 02TM30C is erased, and the first effect display 02TM211 is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This first effect display is an image larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it seems to the player that only the first effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change effect of the first change effect, and displays the image display device 5 in the lower right part of the screen. The character 02TM30A is displayed, the first effect display 02TM211 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E, and the normal mode active display 02TM03 is changed to the blue mode active display 02TM03B.

<Second change effect>
The second change effect is a series of effects composed of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) Change sign effect in which a wave effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wave effect display") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (2B) Movable body 02TM100 at initial position→maximum effect position→initial (2C) Character appearance effect in which a character related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (2D) Friendly character corresponding display (active display, 2nd action change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display by throwing three bombs against the holding display)

In (2D), an effect in which a friendly character throws three bombs against a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as a "second action effect". The effect of changing the display mode is called a "second corresponding display change effect".

In the present embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38) described later and the effect mode determination table (see FIG. 9-41) of the change effect described later, the first special A second change performance can be executed when the variable display corresponding to the pattern is executed, and the second change performance is executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. It adopts a configuration that cannot

In this embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed is mainly the variation display of the first special symbol. There are more variation patterns with shorter variation display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state, and it is difficult to secure the period for executing the second variation performance in the time saving state, so the second special. A configuration is adopted in which the second change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the pattern is executed.

However, without being limited to such a form, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a configuration in which the second change effect cannot be executed may be adopted, and the second special symbol may be supported. A configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when the changed display is executed. For example, when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, in the case of adopting the configuration capable of executing the second change production, in order to secure the period for executing the second change production. , the second change effect may be executed over a plurality of times of change display.

In the above-described embodiment, after the pre-change effect is executed, the maximum action effect, the character appearance effect, and the second action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, not limited to such a form, after the change precursor effect is executed, the maximum action effect, the character appearance effect, and the second action change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. There may be cases where it is not.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), only the change portent effect is executed, and the effect after the maximum movement effect of the second change effect is not executed. A process for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed. At this time, it is decided to execute the false change portent effect at a rate of 3%, and not to execute the false change portent effect at a rate of 97%.

(Production example of the second change production)
FIG. 9-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the second change effect. This example shows an example in which the second change effect is executed while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), at the timing when one second has passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first change effect (2A). A change portent effect is executed, and a wavy effect display 02TM200 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 at the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change portent effect of the second change effect, and erases the wavy effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second change effect (2B) maximum action effect is executed, and the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum effect position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second change effect (2B) maximum action effect, and erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (2C) character appearance effect of the second change effect is executed, and the ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. similar ally character) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum effect position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (5), the effect control CPU 120 ends the character appearance effect (2C) of the second change effect, and erases the teammate character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (2D) second action change effect of the first change effect is executed, and a friend character 02TM30C that throws three bombs against the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the (2D) second action change effect of the second change effect, and The character 02TM30C is erased, and the second effect display 02TM212 is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This second effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it seems to the player that only the second effect display is being displayed. Also, the second action and effect display is an image larger than the first action and effect display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change effect of the second change effect, and displays the image display device 5 in the lower right part of the screen. The character 02TM30A is displayed, the second effect display 02TM212 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E, and the normal mode active display 02TM03 is changed to the red mode active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second effect change effect of the second change effect is displayed in the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the active display area more than the (1D) first effect change effect of the first change effect. It has been performed in a manner that is exaggerated in terms of the size of the effect display.

In the above embodiment, the second change effect is emphasized more than the first change effect in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the effect display displayed in the active display area. Although an example has been shown, the second change effect may be emphasized more than the first change effect by other methods without being limited to such a form.

For example, the first change effect is executed with a white background image when the effect is executed, and the second change effect is executed with a red background image when the effect is executed. In terms of the image, the second change effect may be emphasized more than the first change effect (red>white).

Also, in the first change effect, a friendly character (small) is displayed when the effect is executed, and in the second change effect, a friendly character (large) whose display size is larger than the friendly character (small) is displayed when the effect is executed. By doing so, the second change effect may be emphasized more than the first change effect in terms of the display size of the friend character (friend character (large) > friend character (small)).

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the corresponding display (suspended display or active display) can be displayed in two different display modes, namely, the blue mode and the red mode, which are different from the normal mode. The correspondence display may be displayed in less than two display modes different from the normal mode, or may be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the correspondence display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the correspondence display can be displayed in a blue mode, a red mode, a green mode, or a gold mode, which are different from the normal mode. You may display by four types of display modes of a mode. At this time, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of blue mode<green mode<red mode<gold mode.

<Third change effect>
The third change effect is (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the holding display corresponding to the starting winning. , the timing at which the change order in the pending display area shifts to a higher position (active display area side) (when n≧2), and (iii) the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area. At the timing (the timing at which the active display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed), the corresponding display (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. be.

The third change effect includes (i) an effect of displaying the mode of the pending display corresponding to the start-up winning in a display mode different from the normal mode at the timing of the start-up winning, and (ii) or (iii) shift. It includes an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display at the timing. In addition, in the third change effect, like the first change effect and the second change effect, during the variable display of the special pattern (corresponding decorative pattern), the corresponding display is affected (for example, when the ally character is bombed It does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as “effect effect” as appropriate) that changes the display mode by throwing a

In the present embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38) described later and the effect mode determination table (see FIG. 9-41) of the change effect described later, the first special A configuration is adopted in which the third change effect can be executed in either case when the variable display corresponding to the pattern is executed or when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. ing.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed has an extremely short variation display period. Although it is difficult to secure a period for executing the change production (first change production, second change production) with action production in the time saving state, the third change production without action production in the time saving state Since it is easy to secure a period for executing, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, or when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed Even so, a configuration is adopted in which the third change effect can be executed.

However, without being limited to such a form, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a configuration in which the third change effect cannot be executed may be adopted, and the second special symbol may be corresponded to the second special symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the third change effect cannot be executed when the variable display is executed.

[Look-ahead preview effect]
In the present embodiment, a notice effect or the like for notifying the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the foreknowledge effect, a first lookahead effect and a second lookahead effect can be executed in addition to the pending change effect described above.

<First look-ahead effect>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the first look-ahead effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first look-ahead effect is that the display result of the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is "time saving small hit" by using the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is a kind of pre-reading foreshadowing to suggest.

The first look-ahead effect is a series of effects composed of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In <variable display with first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the characters "HOLD") is displayed superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L. In the first look-ahead A effect where the decoration design is fixed (the number design is not updated) (B) <variable display where the first look-ahead counter is equal to 1>, a fixed icon is attached to the decoration design displayed in the design display areas 5L and 5C. (In this example, an icon containing the characters "HOLD") is superimposed and displayed, and these decoration patterns are fixed (the number patterns are not updated). -38 in more detail below.

In this embodiment, the decorative design fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the decorative design fixed in the first look-ahead B effect are decorative designs including common number designs. Therefore, when the variable display to be notified is executed, the variable display is started in the state where the ready-to-win state is established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

When it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38), in the variable display executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1, the first look-ahead A A decoration pattern of a kind common to the decoration pattern fixed in the performance is determined as a fixed decoration pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C. By doing so, the kind of decoration pattern fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the first look-ahead B effect becomes common, and a ready-to-win state can be achieved in the variable display to be announced.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display targeted for notice is determined to be a "time-saving small hit", the variable display targeted for notice is of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead effect. is determined as a fixed decoration design to be stopped in the design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. By doing so, it is possible to make the decoration pattern fixed in the first look-ahead effect and the decoration pattern finally determined and stopped in the variable display targeted for the notice a common type of decoration pattern. , Appropriate production control can be realized as a look-ahead advance notice production using decorative patterns.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display targeted for notice is determined to be "missing", the decoration pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead effect is used in the variable display targeted for notice. A pattern is determined as a fixed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead performance is decided as a fixed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5R. shall be

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the first prefetch effect is executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area. An effect different from the first prefetch effect may be executed as the prefetch preview effect.

For example, as a pre-reading notice effect using the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas, a special pattern to be notified is executed by executing a pattern enlarging effect in which the decorative patterns are enlarged in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be suggested whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "time saving small hit".

As a look-ahead forewarning effect using the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas, a special pattern to be notified is executed by executing a pattern destruction effect in which the decorative patterns are destroyed (cut) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be suggested whether or not the display result of the variable display of the symbols is the "time-saving small hit".

(Production example of the first look-ahead production)
FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of effects related to the first look-ahead effect.

In this example, when the production mode is [super high speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time saving state), the second pending memory number is 4, and the second pending display is displayed 4 It is In addition, when the display result of the holding memory having the third position of the variation order among these four holding memories is determined as "time-saving small winning", and the starting winning corresponding to this holding memory is generated. In the effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and 3 is set to the first look-ahead counter.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (1), the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of the fixed third decoration symbol of the variable display executed immediately before ("721" in this example) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("721" in this example) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays four second reserved displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-28).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter=2) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the first look-ahead A of the first look-ahead effect An effect is executed, and the fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed superimposed on the third decoration pattern ("7" in this example) in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 of the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as well as the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (3), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols ("772" in this example) indicating that the display result is "loss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decoration pattern ("7" in this example) in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5 A fixed icon 02TM41 is superimposed and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols ("772" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decoration pattern ("7" in this example) in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5 A fixed icon 02TM41 is superimposed and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("772" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("772" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decoration pattern ("7" in this example) in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5 A fixed icon 02TM41 is superimposed and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter=1) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the first look-ahead B of the first look-ahead effect An effect is executed, and the fixed icon 02TM41 is superimposed on each of the third decoration patterns ("7" and "7" in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 of the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as well as the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (7), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols ("771" in this example) indicating that the display result is "loss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decorative pattern (“7” in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. and "7") are superimposed with a fixed icon 02TM41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols ("771" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decorative pattern (“7” in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. and "7") are superimposed with a fixed icon 02TM41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("771" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("771" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, and the third decorative pattern (“7” in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. and "7") are superimposed with a fixed icon 02TM41.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter=0) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, which is a look-ahead preview effect, and the third decoration pattern (in this example, " 7” and “7”), the fixed icon 02TM41 is deleted.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in accordance with the second reserved storage number becoming 1, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (11), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of the third decorative symbols ("777" in this example) indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small win".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third ornamental pattern ("777" in this example) indicating that the will be a "time-saving small hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("777" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

<Second look-ahead effect>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the second look-ahead effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The second look-ahead effect means that the display result of the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is "time saving small hit" without using the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a kind of pre-reading foreshadowing to suggest.

In the second look-ahead performance, the second look-ahead image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the display result will be a ``time-saving small win'' in the variable display to be announced. In this example, the second look-ahead image is a combination of the third decorative patterns indicating that the display result of the stopped display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 will be a "time-saving small win". This image includes a part of the image ("777" in this example). Hereinafter, the image imitating the third decorative design included in the second look-ahead image is appropriately referred to as a "pseudo third decorative design". However, this pseudo third decoration design is an image different from the third decoration design because it does not correspond to the variable display being executed.

In this embodiment, the pseudo third decorative design is an image that includes the number design and the pedestal design, but does not include the light effect display. However, the pseudo third decorative design is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo third decorative design may be a decorative design including at least one of a number design, a pedestal design, and a light effect display.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of an image including a part of the pseudo third decoration pattern is shown as the second look-ahead image. may be used.

For example, the second look-ahead image may be an image containing the character "V" or an image containing the character "FEVER", which suggests that the display result will be a "time-saving small win". Alternatively, the image may include an ally character related to a success effect or a victory effect in Super Reach.

In this embodiment, the value of the second look-ahead counter, which is set when it is determined to execute the second look-ahead effect in the start winning effect determination process, is the value of the second look-ahead counter = 1, 2. In the variable display, the second look-ahead effect is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect is not limited to such a form, and the second look-ahead effect may be executed even in the variable display where the second look-ahead counter is any value of 1, 2, 3, or 4. The second look-ahead counter will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 9-38.

In this embodiment, when the second look-ahead image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second look-ahead image is replaced by another effect image (the third decoration pattern, the characters "super high speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen). etc.). Therefore, it appears to the player that the other effect images and the second look-ahead image are displayed in that order.

However, without being limited to such a form, the second look-ahead image may adopt a configuration in which the display priority (display layer) is higher than that of the other effect images. In this case, by setting the second prefetch image to be a transparent image, the second image is displayed in front of the other effect images. It is possible to visually recognize an effect image (another effect image, etc.) related to the variable display.

In this embodiment, when the effect mode is [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second prefetch effect is executed, and when the second prefetch image is displayed on the image display device 5, the third decoration pattern is displayed. The visibility of the second look-ahead image changes depending on the mode (enlarged display/reduced display). The visibility of the second look-ahead image is lowered when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. That is, when the third decorative design is displayed in an enlarged manner, the visibility of the pseudo third decorative design included in the second look-ahead image is reduced. Further, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size, the visibility of the second look-ahead image is improved. That is, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size, the visibility of the pseudo third decorative pattern included in the second look-ahead image is improved.

(Production example of the second look-ahead production)
FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of effects related to the second look-ahead effect.

In this example, when the production mode is [super high speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time saving state), the second pending memory number is 4, and the second pending display is displayed 4 It is In addition, when the display result of the holding memory having the third position of the variation order among these four holding memories is determined as "time-saving small winning", and the starting winning corresponding to this holding memory is generated. In the effect determination process (see FIG. 9-38), it is decided to execute the second look-ahead effect, and 3 is set to the second look-ahead counter.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (1), the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of the fixed third decoration symbol of the variable display executed immediately before ("721" in this example) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("721" in this example) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays four second reserved displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 9-28).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter=2) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead effect, and executes the second look-ahead effect based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. The second look-ahead image 02TM42 is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 of the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as well as the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36(3), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols ("415" in this example) indicating that the display result is "loss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead effect, and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols ("415" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead effect and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("415" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("415" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter=1) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead effect, and executes the second look-ahead effect based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. The second look-ahead image 02TM42 is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode as the second reserved storage number becomes 2, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36(7), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols ("342" in this example) indicating that the display result is "loss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead effect, and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols ("342" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead effect and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern (in this example, "342") is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("342" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter=0) based on the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the third decorative pattern is started, and the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 02TM03E to display the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in accordance with the second reserved storage number becoming 1, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second reserved display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (11), the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decoration design in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of the third decorative symbols ("777" in this example) indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small win".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third ornamental pattern ("777" in this example) indicating that the will be a "time-saving small hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized third decoration pattern ("777" in this example) is finalized and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 outputs, out of the determination results at the time of winning, the result of determination as to whether or not it will be a big win, the symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the type of the big win, and from the results of the determination at the time of winning, A variation category command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number addition designation command that designates that the number of reserved memories has increased by 1 (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

FIG. 9-38 is a flow chart showing the processing for determining the effect at the time of start winning. The effect control CP 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and , the first reserved storage number addition designation command, or the second reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 stores a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, reserved memory number addition designation commands (first reserved memory number addition designation command, or second It is determined whether or not a reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly stored. If a new command for one set of starting winnings has not been received (NO in step S02TM4010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received (YES in step S02TM4010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting winning is "big hit" or "time". It is determined whether or not it is one of the short hits (step S02TM4015).

The variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of pending memory other than the pending memory corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in the process of step S02TM4015, at the time of starting winning, the display result of the variable display currently being executed or the variable display of the reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the starting winning is "big win" or "time-saving small win". It is determined whether or not

When the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning prize is either "big win" or "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting prize is neither "big win" or "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the effect control CPU 120 sets a change look-ahead prohibition flag, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S02TM4020). If the change look-ahead prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change look-ahead prohibition flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that at least one change effect (suspended change effect, active change effect) is to be executed. Since the processing of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped by setting the change look-ahead prohibition flag, it is possible to execute a change effect on the pending memory whose execution is suspended or the active display currently being executed. In the determined state, it is possible to limit the execution of the change performance for changing the pending display or the active display with respect to the variable display corresponding to the new start winning. This change look-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the effect determination processing at the time of start winning when the change look-ahead prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the change look-ahead prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the active display to the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-39(A)). (Step S02TM4030).

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final display mode of active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and the active display in the change pattern determination table (Fig. 9-39 (B1) to Fig. 9- 40 (B4)) (step S02TM4050).

Here, when the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it means that the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. When the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, the pending display or the active display is changed to display in a mode other than the normal mode. That is, at least one change effect is executed. Therefore, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), any change pattern will cause the suspension display or the active display. You have to decide whether to change. Therefore, in the case of NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern of pending display and active display is determined based on the change pattern determination table in the process of step S02TM4050.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the changed effect based on the effect mode determination table for the changed effect (see FIGS. 9-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change look-ahead counter (step S02TM4070) and sets a change look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set to indicate the number of variable displays until the variable display targeted for the look-ahead preview effect is executed. In this example, a look-ahead counter indicating the number of times of variable display until the variable display targeted for the change effect of the look-ahead notice effect is executed is referred to as a "change look-ahead counter". A look-ahead counter that indicates the number of variable displays until the target variable display is executed is called a "first look-ahead counter", and the variable display that is the target of the second look-ahead effect in the look-ahead effect is executed. A look-ahead counter that indicates the number of variable display times until the display is displayed is referred to as a "second look-ahead counter".

In the case of YES in step S02TM4020, in the case of YES in step S02TM4040, or after step S02TM4080, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (NO in step S02TM4090), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the second pending storage number is 3 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second reserved memory count is not 3 or more (NO in step S02TM4100), that is, if the value of the second reserved memory count is between 0 and 2, effect control CPU 120 terminates the process.

When the value of the second reserved memory number is 3 or more (YES in step S02TM4100), that is, when the value of the second reserved memory number is 3 or 4, the effect control CPU 120 designates by the symbol designation command. It is determined whether or not the displayed result is either "loss" or "time-saving small hit" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is neither "lost" or "time-saving small hit" (NO in step S02TM4110), that is, the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big hit" or "normal small hit". If the result is either "hit", it is determined whether or not a first prefetch prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4120). When the first prefetch prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first look-ahead prohibition flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the first look-ahead effect is to be executed. Since the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped by setting the first look-ahead prohibition flag, it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead effect for the pending memory whose execution is suspended. In this state, the execution of the first look-ahead effect can be restricted with respect to the variable display corresponding to the new start winning. This first look-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the effect determination processing at the time of start winning when the first look-ahead prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the first look-ahead prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first look-ahead effect is to be executed. (see step S02TM4130).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the first look-ahead effect (step S02TM4140). If it is not decided to execute the first look-ahead effect (NO in step S02TM4140), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4170.

If it is decided to execute the first look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4140), effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150) and sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160). ), the process proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In the case of YES in step S02TM4120, in the case of NO in step S02TM4140, or after step S02TM4160, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a second prefetch prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4170). If the second prefetch prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4170), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead prohibition flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the second look-ahead effect is to be executed. Since the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped by setting the second look-ahead prohibition flag, it was decided to execute the second look-ahead effect for the pending memory whose execution is suspended. In this state, the execution of the second look-ahead effect can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to the new start winning. This second look-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the effect determination processing at the time of start winning when the second look-ahead prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the second look-ahead prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second look-ahead effect is to be executed. (see step S02TM4180).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the second look-ahead effect (step S02TM4190). If it is not determined to execute the second look-ahead effect (NO in step S02TM4190), effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If it is determined to execute the second look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4190), effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200) and sets the second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210). ), the process ends.

Thus, in the process of step S02TM4015, when the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither "big win" or "time-saving small win", the corresponding display (holding display, active display) By skipping the processing (steps S02TM4020 to step S02TM4080) for determining whether or not to execute a change effect for and the processing (step S02TM4090 to step S02TM4210) for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect , In the state where there is a variable display that has been determined to be a "big hit" or a "small time-saving hit", it is unavoidable to decide to execute a look-ahead notice effect in the variable display corresponding to the new start winning. It is possible to prevent appropriate performance control from being executed.

[Tables referenced in the start-up prize-winning effect determination process]
FIGS. 9-39 to 9-42 are specific examples of tables referred to in any one of the start winning effect determination processing. FIG. 9-39A is an example of an active display final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the active display final display mode in step S02TM4030. FIGS. 9-39(B1) to 9-40(B4) are an example of the change pattern determination table referred to when determining the change pattern of pending display and active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 9-41 is an example of the effect mode determination table of the changed effect referred to when determining the effect mode of the changed effect in step S02TM4060. FIG. 9-42(1) is an example of a first look-ahead effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect in step S02TM4130. FIG. 9-42(2) is an example of a second look-ahead effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect in step S02TM4180.

<Table for Determining Final Display Mode of Active Display>
FIG. 9-39A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-39(A), in this embodiment, it is possible to decide one of the "normal mode", "blue mode" and "red mode" as the final display mode of the active display. A judgment value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in FIG. 9-39 (A), if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 90%, and the blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 8%. ), and at a rate of 2%, it becomes a red mode (red circle display).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) The final display mode of the active display corresponding to 75% of the time is the normal mode, 15% of the time is the blue mode, and 10% of the time is the red mode.

<Change pattern determination table>
FIGS. 9-39 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 9-40 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for pending display and active display. When the number of pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing at which the n-th hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area (at the time of the start winning) timing), (ii) the timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a higher position (active display area side) in the change order in the pending display area (when n≧2), and (iii) that Display information (holding display or active display) may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the descriptions of FIGS. 9-39 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 9-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift means that the suspended display shifts from the suspended display area to the active display area. (As a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed).

In the present embodiment, at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above, the display information (holding display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner. It is viable. In this example, the pending change effect includes (i) an effect of displaying the pending display mode corresponding to the start winning in a display mode different from the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, (ii) or ( At the shift timing of iii), an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display is included. In addition, not limited to such a form, in the pending change effect, during the variable display of the special pattern (decorative pattern corresponding to this), it acts on the pending display (for example, an arrow is stuck in the pending display). It may include an effect of changing the display mode by .

In FIGS. 9-39 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 9-40 (B3) and (B4), display corresponding to variable display at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern It shows how the information (suspended display or active display) is displayed. In the change patterns shown in the figure, "normal" indicates a normal mode that is a white circular display, "blue" indicates a blue mode that is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates a red aspect, which is a red circular display.

([For one hold] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reservation shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 105 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, the change pattern from normal to normal. be.

Similarly, a change pattern 102 is normal→blue, a change pattern 103 is blue→blue, a change pattern 104 is blue→red, and a change pattern 105 is a red→red change pattern.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the blue mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 102 at 5%, and the change pattern 103 at a rate of 90%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the variation pattern 101 is 10%, the variation pattern 102 is 2%, the variation pattern 103 is 10%, the variation pattern 104 is 8%, and the variation pattern 104 is 8%. Judgment values are assigned so that 105 is determined at a rate of 70%.

([For 2 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 2 reservations shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 208 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 201, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of , in a normal mode, that is, a change pattern of normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, changing pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, changing pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, changing pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, changing pattern 205 is normal → blue red, changing pattern 206 is blue → A change pattern 207 is a change pattern of blue→red→red, and a change pattern 208 is a change pattern of red→red→red.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the blue aspect, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 201 is 10%, the variation pattern 202 is 5%, the variation pattern 203 is 5%, and the variation pattern 204 is 80%. .

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the variation pattern 201 is 10%, the variation pattern 202 is 2%, the variation pattern 203 is 2%, the variation pattern 204 is 10%, and the variation pattern 204 is 10%. The determination values are assigned so that 205 is 1%, the variation pattern 206 is 8%, the variation pattern 207 is 8%, and the variation pattern 208 is 60%.

([For 3 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 3 pending items shown in FIG. . A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 308 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 301, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. In this change pattern, the suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode, and the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, the change pattern of normal→normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, the changing pattern 302 is normal→normal→blue→blue, the changing pattern 303 is normal→blue→blue→blue, the changing pattern 304 is blue→blue→blue→blue, and the changing pattern 305 is normal→blue→red. → red, a change pattern 306 is blue→blue→red→red, a change pattern 307 is blue→red→red→red, and a change pattern 308 is a change pattern of red→red→red→red.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the changing pattern 301 is 6%, the changing pattern 302 is 2%, the changing pattern 303 is 2%, and the changing pattern 304 is 90%. .

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the variation pattern 301 is 10%, the variation pattern 302 is 2%, the variation pattern 303 is 2%, the variation pattern 304 is 10%, and the variation pattern 304 is 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that 305 is 1%, variation pattern 306 is 8%, variation pattern 307 is 8%, and variation pattern 308 is 60%.

([For 4 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 4 reserved pieces shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 412 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 401, after the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, that is, a change pattern of normal->normal->normal->normal->normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 402 is normal→normal→normal→blue→blue, the change pattern 403 is normal→normal→blue→blue→blue, the change pattern 404 is normal→blue→blue→blue→blue, and the change pattern 405. blue→blue→blue→blue→blue change pattern 406 is normal→normal→blue→red→red; change pattern 407 is normal→blue→blue→red→red; change pattern 408 is normal→blue→red→red→ Red, changing pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, changing pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, changing pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, changing pattern 412 is red → The change pattern is red->red->red->red.

Here, regarding the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "missing" or "jackpot") , the decision values are assigned so that the variation pattern 401 is 10%, the variation pattern 402 is 10%, the variation pattern 403 is 10%, the variation pattern 404 is 10%, and the variation pattern 405 is 60%. there is

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the variation pattern 401 is 20%, the variation pattern 402 is 5%, the variation pattern 403 is 5%, the variation pattern 404 is 5%, and the variation pattern 404 is 5%. 405 is 20%, variation pattern 406 is 2%, variation pattern 407 is 2%, variation pattern 408 is 2%, variation pattern 409 is 7%, variation pattern 410 is 6%, variation pattern 411 is 6%, variation pattern 412 is assigned at a rate of 20%.

<Production Mode Determination Table for Change Production>
FIGS. 9-41 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode determination table of the change effect. As shown in FIGS. 9-41 (1) and (2), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the determination ratio of the effect mode of the change effect differs depending on the change timing in the change pattern. .

FIG. 9-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table of the change effect [for the first special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→blue", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute the second change effect at a rate of 0%. , decides to execute the third change effect at a rate of 80%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→red", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 15%, and to execute the second change effect at a rate of 80%. , decides to execute the third change effect at a rate of 5%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue→red", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute the second change effect at a rate of 50%. , to execute the third change effect at a rate of 10%.

FIG. 9-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the change effect of [for the second special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→blue", it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→red", it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue→red", it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

<Production mode determination table for first look-ahead production>
FIG. 9-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the first look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the first look-ahead effect differs according to the display result specified by the symbol specification command. ing.

When the display result is "miss", it is decided not to execute the first look-ahead effect at a rate of 90%, and to execute the first look-ahead effect at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the display result is ``time-saving small win'', it is decided not to execute the first look-ahead performance at a rate of 70%, and to execute the first look-ahead performance at a rate of 30%.

<Production mode determination table for second look-ahead production>
FIG. 9-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the second look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the determination ratio of execution or non-execution of the second look-ahead effect differs depending on the display result specified by the symbol specifying command. ing.

When the display result is "miss", it is decided not to execute the second look-ahead effect at a rate of 95%, and to execute the second look-ahead effect at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the display result is ``time-saving small hit'', it is determined not to execute the first look-ahead performance at a rate of 80%, and to perform the first look-ahead performance at a rate of 20%.

In this way, when the display result is "miss", the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution ratio of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. In addition, when the display result is "time-saving small win", the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution ratio of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. Thus, the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

In addition, among the look-ahead foretelling effects, the pattern enlarging effect may have a higher execution ratio than the reserved look-ahead foretelling effect. Also, the total value of the execution ratios of the first look-ahead effect and the enlarging pattern effect may be higher than the total value of the execution ratios of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot occurrence count value" as appropriate.) is a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as "mode switching determination value" as appropriate.) It adopts a configuration in which the production mode in the state is switched.

In this example, the mode switching determination value is set to "3". When the number of occurrences of the big hit is 1 or 2 times counting from the first hit (that is, when the count value of the occurrence of the big hit < the mode switching judgment value), it can be controlled to [Dream RUSH] as the performance mode of the time-saving state a, and the big hit occurs. When the number of times counted from the first hit is 3 times or more (that is, when the big hit occurrence count value ≥ the mode switching judgment value), it is possible to control to "super high speed HYPER RUSH" as the effect mode of the time saving state a.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or less than the mode switching determination value, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can notify the number of hits counted from the first hit (jackpot occurrence count value), and the number of remaining jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value (mode switching judgment value - jackpot). Occurrence count value) can be notified. Therefore, according to the jackpot count display, how many times of the remaining jackpots should be generated until it shifts to [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] where the variation pattern with a short variation display period (fast variation speed) is executed at a high rate. It can be suitably shown to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a required number of big wins notification performance for notifying the number of remaining big wins required to reach the mode switching determination value without using the big win count display during the ending period of the big win. In the required number of big wins notification performance, the required number of big wins display related to the number of remaining big wins required until reaching the mode switching determination value is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . The display of the number of required jackpots includes the words "n more times until ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (n=1, 2) (see FIGS. 9-51 (8) and 9-56 (23)).

In this example, when the big win occurrence count value = 1 is a big win, two more big wins are required until the mode switching judgment value is reached. is appropriately referred to as "required jackpot number notification effect [twice]". In addition, when the big win occurrence count value = 2 is a big win, one more big win is required until the mode switching judgment value is reached. Appropriately referred to as "required number of big hits notification effect [1 time]".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (that is, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), a specific type of jackpot gaming state (in this example, "symbol 10Ra time-short jackpot ”, “10Rb time-saving jackpot”, “10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit”) during the round period, or during the small-hitting game period of a specific type of small-hit game state (in this example, “time-saving small hit”), A big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and the center of the screen. In addition, during the period (variation display start waiting period, variation display period) during which the production mode in the time saving state a is controlled to [Dream RUSH], the big hit count display is displayed on the left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is composed of four parts, a first count part, a second count part, a third count part, and a reach part, from the bottom of the screen to the top of the screen. The characters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count portion, the second count portion, and the third count portion of the jackpot count display. In addition, characters of "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed in the reach portion of the jackpot count display. Hereinafter, the first count portion of the jackpot count display is appropriately referred to as "jackpot count display (first count portion)" or "first count portion". The same applies to the second count portion, the third count portion, and the reach portion of the big win count display. Also, at least one of the first count portion, the second count portion, and the third count portion of the jackpot count display is appropriately referred to as a "count portion".

<Display mode of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the display size of the reaching portion is larger than the display size of any count portion in the jackpot count display. Further, among the count portions of the jackpot count display, the display size of the third count portion is larger than the display size of the first count portion and the second count portion, and the display size of the second count portion is the display size of the first count portion. bigger than That is, the display size increases in the order of the first count portion, the second count portion, the third count portion, and the arrival portion. Therefore, the information displayed in the count section (the letter "V", the letter "WIN", etc.) is the information displayed in the first count section, the information displayed in the second count section, and the information displayed in the third count section. The display size increases in the order of displayed information (displayed with emphasis). In addition, the information displayed in the reach section ("PREMIUM FEVER" characters) is larger than the information displayed in any of the count sections (characters "V", characters "WIN", etc.). (shown highlighted).

In the above-described embodiment, as a method of varying the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display, an example of varying the degree of emphasis by varying the display size was shown, but other methods are also possible. may be used to vary the degree of emphasis of each portion of the jackpot count display.

For example, when adopting a configuration in which each part of the big hit count display can emit light, the light emission luminance is increased in order of the first count part, the second count part, the third count part, and the arrival part. The degree of emphasis of each part of the count display may be varied.

Further, when adopting a configuration in which each part of the jackpot count display can blink, by shortening the blinking intervals in the order of the first count part, the second count part, the third count part, and the arrival part, The degree of emphasis of each part of the count display may be varied.

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the degree of emphasis is changed by changing the display mode of each part of the big win count display. The degree of emphasis may differ depending on the

For example, in a configuration where the transmittance of the jackpot count display can be set to an arbitrary value, when the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value=1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display has a transmittance of 90%. When the big win count display corresponding to the big win occurrence count value=2 is displayed in the display mode, the entire big win count display is displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 50% and corresponding to the big win occurrence count value=3. When the jackpot count display is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 0%.

In the present embodiment, the count part (first count part, second count part, third count part) of the jackpot count display has three display modes: an initial mode, a first change mode, and a second change mode. can be displayed with In the present embodiment, the effect of changing the count portion from the initial state to the first change state is called V change effect, and the effect of changing the count portion from the first change state to the second change state is called WIN change effect.

A series of effects of the V change effect and the WIN change effect that are executed for the first count section are appropriately called "first stage effect", and the V change effect and the WIN change effect that are executed for the second count section. A series of effects will be appropriately referred to as a "second stage effect", and a series of effects of the V change effect and the WIN change effect executed for the third counting section will be appropriately referred to as a "third stage effect".

When the count part is displayed in the initial mode, the information displayed in the count part is a white character "V", and when the count part is displayed in the first change mode, the information displayed in the count part is "V" in red letters, and when the count portion is displayed in the second change mode, the information displayed in the count portion is "WIN" in red letters.

In this embodiment, when the V change effect is executed for the counting section, the big hit occurrence display (in this example, FIG. 9- 51 (5), the red letter "V" shown in (5)) acts on the white letter "V" displayed in the count section of the initial mode, thereby changing the " V” will change to red letters.

In addition, the arrival portion of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two types of display modes, ie, an initial mode and a change mode. In the present embodiment, the effect of changing the reaching portion from the initial state to the changing state is referred to as reaching portion changing effect.

When the arrival part is displayed in the initial mode, the information displayed in the arrival part is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white characters, and when the arrival part is displayed in the modified mode, the information displayed in the arrival part is "PREMIUM FEVER" is written in red.

<[At the time of the jackpot] Display timing and change timing of the jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, when it is decided to display the big hit count display in the big hit production determination process (see FIG. 9-43), every time a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value of 1, 2, or 3 occurs. In the big win game state, the big win count display can be displayed, and the display mode of each count part corresponding to the big win occurrence count value is changed in order from the initial mode to the first change mode and the second change mode.

In the present embodiment, a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value of 2 or more is a big hit that occurs when the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed is controlled. is. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the display result becomes a "small hit" rather than the big hit generated by the display result becoming a "big hit", and the V prize is passed. 9-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining that a big win with a big win occurrence count value of 2 or more occurs, an example in which a big win via a small win occurs will be used. Since the same applies to the case of a big hit caused by a game, the explanation is omitted.

(1) <When a big hit occurs count value = 1>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the right-handed notification of the first round ends to the timing when the second round ends), the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 A jackpot count display is displayed. At this time, each count portion and arrival portion are both displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-51 (5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has passed), the jackpot hits at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, the V change effect is executed for the first count section, and the first count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. Also, the second count, the third count portion, and the arrival portion are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-51 (6)).

(1-3) Then, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has passed to the timing when the second predetermined period has passed), an image is displayed. The jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the central part of the screen of the device 5 . At this time, the WIN change effect is executed for the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. Also, the second count, the third count portion, and the arrival portion are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-51(7)).

(2) <When a big hit occurs count value = 2>
(2-1) The small winning game period in the small winning game state and the big winning round period in the big winning game state (in this example, the timing when the V winning in the small winning game period is issued to the end of the second round of the big winning round period period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the first count section is continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section are all continuously displayed in the initial mode ( See Figure 9-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has passed), the jackpot hits at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, the V change effect is executed for the second count section, and the second count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the first count portion is continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the third count portion and the arrival portion are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (Fig. 9-56 (21) reference).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has passed to the timing when the second predetermined period has passed), an image is displayed. The jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the central part of the screen of the device 5 . At this time, the WIN change effect is executed for the second count section, and the second count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. In addition, the first count portion is continuously displayed in the second change mode, and both the third count portion and the reaching portion are continuously displayed in the initial mode (FIG. 9-56 (22) reference).

(3) <When a big hit occurs count value = 3>
(3-1) The small winning game period in the small winning game state and the jackpot round period in the big winning game state (in this example, from the timing when the V winning in the small winning game period to the second round of the big winning round period ends period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the first count portion and the second count portion are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the third count portion and the arrival portion are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (Fig. 9-59(11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has passed), the jackpot hits at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, the V change effect is executed for the third count section, and the third count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. Also, the first count portion and the second count portion are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the arrival portion is continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-59 (12)). .

(3-3) Then, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has passed to the timing when the second predetermined period has passed), an image is displayed. The jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the central part of the screen of the device 5 . At this time, the second change effect is executed for the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. The first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the reach section is continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-59 (13)).

(3-4) Then, the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period have passed since the third round started to the timing when the third predetermined period has passed ), the big win count display is continuously displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, a reaching portion change effect is executed for the reaching portion, and the reaching portion changes from the initial mode to the changing mode. The first count section, the second count section, and the third count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode (see FIG. 9-59 (14)).

<[During time saving state] Display timing of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the big win count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the a time-saving state controlled after the big win occurrence count value=1, 2 occurs.

In this example, in a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH], which is controlled after the occurrence of a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the fluctuation display is based on the fact that the big hit count display flag described later is set. During the start waiting period and the variable display period, the big win count display can be displayed on the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (FIGS. 9-58 (1) and (2), and FIGS. 9-61 (1) to ( 3) See).

However, in a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH], which is controlled after the occurrence of a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value = 1, 2, even during the variable display period in which the big hit count display flag is set, a super ready-to-win effect is being executed, the jackpot count display is erased from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed (FIGS. 9-58 (3) and (8), and FIG. 9-61 (4 ) to (7)). If it develops into a super reach production, the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" (via a small hit) and will notify you of whether or not a big hit will occur, or the display result will be a "normal small hit" and it will fall to the normal state. We are performing a production to notify whether or not it will be done. The information (jackpot count display) that informs the current number of hit occurrences (jackpot occurrence count value) is more than the information related to the super reach effect (super reach effect effect image) that informs the display result of the variable display being executed. Since the priority is low for the player, the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super ready-to-win effect is developed.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the big hit count display is not displayed when the super ready-to-win effect is developed. A jackpot count display may be displayed.

<[During time saving state] Display mode of jackpot count display>
In the present embodiment, in the a time-saving state, which is controlled after the occurrence of a big hit with a big win occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the big win count display displayed on the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is controlled to the a time-saving state. It is displayed in the same display mode as the display mode immediately before being erased when it was displayed in the big win before being played.

In this example, in a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH], which is controlled after the occurrence of a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value of 1, the big hit immediately before being erased when it was displayed as a big hit (jackpot count = 1) Display mode of count display (the first count part is displayed in the second change mode, and the second count, the third count part, and the arrival part are all displayed in the initial mode (Fig. 9-51 (7) ))), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, in a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH], which is controlled after the occurrence of a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value = 2, the big hit count display immediately before it is erased when it was displayed as a big hit (jackpot count = 2) display mode (the first count part and the second count part are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count part and the arrival part are displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 9-56 (22))) A jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in a similar manner.

[Production determination process during jackpot]
FIG. 9-43 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during a big hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process during the big hit shown in FIG. 9-43 in the effect process (step S176) during the big hit of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the big win by the effect determining process during the big win shown in FIG. 9-43.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

When the jackpot type of the jackpot is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, the jackpot type is "symbol 10Ra time-short jackpot", "symbol 10Rb time-short jackpot", "10Ra time-short jackpot via short time jackpot", etc. If it is one of the jackpot types, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not less than 3 (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10000), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), that is, when the jackpot occurrence count value is any one of 1 to 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display. It decides (step S02TM5030) and sets a jackpot count display flag (step S02TM5040).

The big win count display flag is a kind of flag that is set when it is decided to display the big win count display at the start of the big win or at the time of V winning in the small win. This big win count display flag is a flag indicating that the big win count display is displayed in the big win game state, the small win game state, or the time saving state, and the above-mentioned first flag or second flag is erased (reset). It is erased at the same timing as the timing.

After the processing of step S02TM5040, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

When the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first stage effect (V change effect, WIN change effect) for the first count portion of the jackpot count display. (Step S02TM5060), it is determined to execute the necessary big hit number notification effect [twice] (Step S02TM5070), and the process ends.

When the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

When the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN change effect) for the second count portion of the jackpot count display. (Step S02TM5090), it is determined to execute the necessary big hit number notification effect [1 time] (Step S02TM5100), and the process ends as it is.

When the big hit occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big win occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). When the big hit occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third stage effect (V change effect, WIN change effect) for the third count part of the jackpot count display. (Step S02TM5120), it is determined to execute the reaching portion change effect (Step S02TM5130), and the process ends as it is.

[Production decision processing during small hit]
FIG. 9-44 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during a small hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process during the small hit shown in FIGS. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the small hit start designation command, the effect to be executed during the small hit (and the effect not to be executed) is determined by the effect determination process during the small hit shown in FIG. 9-44. .

In this example, when a V prize is generated in the small win opening process executed when the small win game state is controlled, 1 is added to the big win occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data. It is assumed that update processing is being executed by

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not less than 3 (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10000), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3 (at the time of the first hit (jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the jackpot via the small hit is irregular). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends the process.

[Effect decision processing at waiting for start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-45 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during the waiting period for the start of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start waiting effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-45 in the variable display start waiting effect process (step S170) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the customer waiting demo command is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the waiting period for the start of the variable display by the effect determining process for waiting for the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-45. decide.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), effect control CPU 120 determines to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020), and ends the process.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (jackpot, or hit, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, etc.), and the fluctuation time of the special symbol and Variation display of special symbols is executed based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command that specifies the effect content (reach, pseudo-run, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 00, and , It is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the contents of the production (reach and pseudo consecutive etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-46 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-46 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-46.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020).

In this way, in this fluctuation start effect determination process, whether or not the big win count display determined to be displayed in the change start waiting effect determination process (see FIG. 9-45) is continuously displayed at the start of the change. is determining whether

[Processing for judgment during fluctuation]
FIG. 9-47 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during the variable display execution period. The effect control CPU 120 executes the during-variation effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-47 in the effect process during variable display (step S172) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the execution period of the variable display by the during-variation effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-47.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020), and it is time to develop the variation pattern to super reach. (step S02TM9030).

Whether the CPU 103 measures the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5 and whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern In the special symbol variation process (S112) including the process of determining whether or not, it is possible to obtain information about the elapsed time of the currently executed variation display. Then, in step S02TM9030, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the information, whether or not the current variation time is the timing of development to super reach in the variation pattern.

If it is not the time to develop the variation pattern to super reach (NO in step S02TM9030), effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When it is time for the variation pattern to develop to super reach (YES in step S02TM9030), effect control CPU 120 erases the big hit count display (step S02TM9040), and ends the process as it is.

In this way, in the effect determining process during fluctuation, whether or not the big win count display determined to be displayed in the effect determining process (see FIG. 9-45) at the time of waiting for the start of fluctuation is displayed continuously during the change. Also, it is determined whether or not to erase during fluctuation.

[Example of production when the first hit is a “symbol 3R normal jackpot”]
9-48 to 9-49, description will be made regarding an example of the effect when the first win of the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs while the game is controlled in the [normal mode].

FIG. 9-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first hit of the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" while being controlled in the [normal mode], and FIG. 9-49. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs while the [normal mode] is being controlled.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to the [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result as "jackpot" ("symbol 3R normal jackpot") is executed, the jackpot game is played. state, and then the production mode is controlled to [normal mode].

First, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (1), when the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (T1 shown in FIG. 9-48) ), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, displays a combination of confirmed decorative symbols (this example Then, "222") is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("222" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the big hit occurrence count value is updated to 1 in the special symbol stop processing (see FIG. 9-22).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the big hit gaming state (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-48), the production control CPU 120 that receives the big hit start designation command is the production The control for setting the mode to [Normal mode] is ended, and a big-hit start image (characters of "FEVER" in this example) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3), at the timing (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-48) when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 , to display a jackpot round game image on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加This jackpot round game image includes a round display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game (characters "Round 1" in this example) and a prize ball number display indicating the total number of awarded balls ("TOTAL" in this example). 00000”).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always right-handed promotion image is an image containing the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to enter the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (here, the big winning opening). .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the big hit game state (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-48), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot end designation command. displays a jackpot end image (in this example, the total number of awarded balls display (characters of "TOTAL 00450") indicating the total number of awarded balls, teammate characters) on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

At this time, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 9-23), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-48), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [normal mode]. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a combination of fixed decorative patterns ("222" in this example) common to the combination of fixed decorative patterns fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("222" in this example) is displayed. At this time, a background image corresponding to the [normal mode] (in this example, a sunny background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of production when the first hit is “symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot”]
9-50 to 9-52, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the first hit of the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs while the game is controlled in the [normal mode].

FIG. 9-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the first hit of the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs while being controlled in the [normal mode], and FIG. 9-51. 9-52 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs while the [normal mode] is being controlled.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to the [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result as "big hit" ("symbol 10Ra time-saving big hit") is executed, the big hit game state, and then the production mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH].

First, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), when the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (T1 shown in FIG. 9-50 ), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (this example Then, "555") is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("555" in this example) is determined and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the big hit occurrence count value is updated to 1 in the special symbol stop processing (see FIG. 9-22).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the big hit gaming state (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-50), the production control CPU 120 that receives the big hit start designation command is the production The control for setting the mode to [Normal Mode] is ended, and a big win start image (characters of "Dream FEVER" in this example) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (3), at the timing (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-48) when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 9-49(3), the image display device 5 always displays the right-handed promotion image in the upper right portion of the screen, and also displays the right-handed promotion image over the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. This emphasized right-handed promotion image is an image that includes the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed players to win a prize in a large winning slot. is emphasized.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display a big hit round game start image. However, this jackpot round game start image is an image with a lower display priority than the emphasized right-handed promotion image. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the images appearing to be displayed in the order of the emphasized right-handed promotion image and the jackpot round game start image. However, in this example, since the display area for the jackpot round game start image and the emphasized right-handed promotion image is common (the entire screen of the image display device 5), only the emphasized right-handed promotion image can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51(4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the emphasized right-handed promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-50). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot round game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . This jackpot round game start image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game, and the characters "Aim for the attacker!" It is an image including a jackpot right hitting promotion image including an arrow image for instructing hitting, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (5), the effect control CPU 120 erases the big hit round game start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial mode on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. The jackpot count display 02TM300 is displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a big hit occurrence display (in this example, red letter "V") in the center of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (6), the effect control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes V change effect on the first count portion. Then, the first count section is changed from the initial mode (white letter "V") to the first change mode (red letter "V") (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display (in this example, characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, In the lower right portion of the screen, a display of the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 00300") corresponding to the current number of awarded balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect for the first count portion, and changes the first count portion to the first change mode (white letter "V"). ) to the second change mode (red letter “V”) (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the given current A display of the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 00330") is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the big hit game state (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-50), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot end designation command executes a required number of big wins notification effect, and displays the required number of big wins related to the number of remaining big wins required to reach the mode switching judgment value on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ("2 more until super high speed HYPER RUSH times”).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (9), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the required big win number notification effect, erases the required big win number display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and The image for entering the production mode (in this example, the image including the characters "Dream RUSH") is displayed on the entire screen (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-50).

[Example of production when the first hit is “symbol 10Rb short time jackpot”]
When it is controlled to [Normal mode], the first hit of the "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit" occurs, and then when it is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], the "10Ra time-saving big hit via the time-saving small hit" hits. 9-53 to 9-56 will be used to explain examples of effects when this occurs.

In FIG. 9-53, when it is controlled to [Normal mode], the first hit of "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, and then when it is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], "10Rb via time-saving small hit 9-54 to 9-56 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the "time saving jackpot" jackpot occurs, and FIGS. An explanatory view showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of "Time-saving big hit" occurs and then the big hit of "10Rb Time-saving big hit via time-saving small hit" occurs when it is controlled to [Invincible RUSH]. be.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result as "big hit" ("symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit") is executed, the big hit game After that, the performance mode is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], and during this [Invincible RUSH], the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the display result of which is "time-saving small hit", and the small win. It is assumed that a V prize is generated at , and the state is controlled to a big hit game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (1), when the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (T1 shown in FIG. 9-53) ), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (this example Then, "777") is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the big hit occurrence count value is updated to 1 in the special symbol stop processing (see FIG. 9-22).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the big hit game state (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-53), the production control CPU 120 that receives the big hit start designation command is the production The control for setting the mode to [Normal Mode] is ended, the first part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, and the characters "DREAM FEVER" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification effect and displays the characters "DREAM FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Then, a cracked image in which the screen is cracked is superimposed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-53). The cracked image is an image with a higher display priority than the characters "DREAM FEVER". Therefore, from the player's point of view, the cracked image and the characters "DREAM FEVER" appear to be displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54(4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification effect, and erases the characters "DREAM FEVER" and the cracked image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-53).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the image. The characters "3000" are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 9-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the accessory does not operate when the 3000 notification effect is executed. good. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum effect position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification effect, and displays the characters "3000 FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 - timing of T6 shown in 53).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit" occurs, the 3000 notification effect composed of the first part to the fifth part is executed, so that the 10 rounds of the first hit (1500 pieces) and the prize balls (1500 pieces) for 10 rounds of big hits which are substantially determined next time, that is, a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded.

Next, the contents shown in FIGS. 9-54(7) to 9-55(11) are the same as the contents shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (12), the effect control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and after the jackpot game state ends b Time saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) is executed, characters "3000 FEVER" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and " Configurations” is displayed (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 9-53).

This telop display is an image similar to the telop display displayed when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH], and the telop display is displayed during the jackpot round period before being controlled to [Invincible RUSH]. By, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the b time saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the end of the big hit game state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the round display corresponding to the round currently being executed (in this example, the characters “Round 4”) to be displayed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the given current A display of the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 00450") is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (13), the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state and starts the b time saving state (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control CPU 120 is the effect The mode is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], and in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2, the combination of the fixed decorative patterns fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before and the combination of the fixed second decorative patterns of the same kind. ("777" in this example) is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image at the start of time saving on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This time-saving starting right-handed promotion image is an image containing characters of "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed in order to win the second start winning opening.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a telop display including characters "Congratulations" on the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is controlled to [Invincible RUSH].

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period when [Invincible RUSH] is controlled, the number of prize balls displayed (this In the example, the characters "TOTAL 01500") are displayed. In the b time-saving state controlled after the ``symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot'', the next jackpot is substantially determined, so the display of the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls given in the immediately preceding jackpot is continued even after the big win. The special feeling of the time-saving state b is improved by displaying the

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (14), based on the occurrence of a new start winning to the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 changes the second special symbol with the display result being "lost". When the display is started (timing of T14 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 of the image display device 5, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In 5R2, the variable display of the second decoration pattern is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (15), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T14 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control for receiving the symbol confirmation designation command The CPU 120 confirms and stops the combination of the confirmed second decorative symbols ("142" in this example) indicating that the display result is "lost" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("142" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

After that, it is assumed that the variable display is performed m (m≧1) times, and all the display results are “mismatch”. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (16) onwards, in the next variable display, the display result is assumed to be "shorter working hours".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (16), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is "time saving small hit" (timing of T16 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect The control CPU 120 starts variable display of the second decorative design in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (17), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T17 shown in FIG. The CPU 120 confirms and stops the combination of the confirmed second decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is the "time-saving small hit" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (18), at the timing (timing of T18 shown in FIG. 9-53) at which the CPU 103 starts the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hitting start designation command , to display an emphasized right-handed promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . This emphasized right-handed promotion image is an image containing the characters "right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed to enter the V winning slot.

In the above embodiment, the emphasized right-handed promotion image in the big-hit game state is displayed during the big-hit round game period after the end of the big-hit fanfare period, and the emphasized right-handed promotion image in the small-hit game state is displayed in the small-hit game state. Although an example of displaying during the winning fanfare period has been shown, the image is not limited to such a form, and the emphasized right-handed promotion image during the big winning game state may be displayed during the big winning fanfare period, or during the small winning game state. , may be displayed during the small winning fanfare period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small hit game period (timing of T19 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control CPU 120 controls the entire screen of the image display device 5. Remove the enhanced right-handed promotion image from. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small winning game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . This small-hit game start image is an image containing a small-hit right-handed promotion image including characters "Aim for V!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (20), when the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game is opened, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is within a predetermined valid period. At the timing when the game ball is detected by the V prize switch 87a (the timing of T20 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control CPU 120 displays the occurrence of a big hit in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, " "V") is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count portion is displayed in the second change mode, and the second count portion, the third count portion, and the reaching portion are displayed in the initial mode.

At the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the small-hit game state, the big-hit occurrence count value is updated from 1 to 2 in the small-hit end processing (see FIG. 9-24).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small hit game state and starts the big hit game state (timing of T21 shown in FIG. 9-53), for effect control The CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes V change effect on the second count portion to set the second count portion to the initial state (white letters of "V"). to the first change mode ("V" in red).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display (in this example, characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, In the lower right part of the screen, a display of the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 01800") corresponding to the current number of awarded balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (22), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect for the second count portion, and sets the second count portion to the first change mode (red letter "V"). ) to the second change mode (“WIN” in red letters) (timing of T22 shown in FIG. 9-53).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the given current A display of the number of prize balls (characters of "TOTAL 01830" in this example) corresponding to the number of prize balls is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the big hit game state (timing of T23 shown in FIG. 9-53), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot end designation command. executes a required number of big wins notification effect, and displays the required number of big wins related to the number of remaining big wins required to reach the mode switching determination value on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ("1 more to super high speed HYPER RUSH times”).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (24), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the required big win number notification effect, erases the required big win number display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and causes the image display device 5 to An image for entering the production mode (in this example, an image including the characters "Dream RUSH") is displayed on the entire screen of .

In this way, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, during the [first jackpot], the first stage effect is executed for the first count part of the jackpot count display, and the jackpot game state is performed. After the end, a special notification effect is executed to notify that it is controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]), and the [second big hit] (time-saving small During the 10Ra time-saving jackpot via winning, the second stage production (V change production, WIN production) is executed for the second count part of the big win count display.

By executing the special notification effect in the [first big win], the second stage effect is executed for the big win count display, that is, 1 remains until the big win occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value. It is possible to inform the fact that it is practically confirmed that the game will be realized, and it is possible to give the player a special feeling for the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot".

In this way, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, the player can clear the majority (2/3) of the value (3 of the mode switching judgment value) that the player should aim for in the jackpot count display. , the special feeling of the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is improved more than other jackpot types at the time of the first hit.

In the above-described embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, during the [first jackpot], the first stage production (V change production, WIN production) is executed, and during the [second big hit] (10Ra time-saving big hit via short-time small hit) that occurred during the b time-saving state controlled after the first big hit, for the second count part of the big win count display An example in which the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed is shown.

However, not limited to such a form, during the [first big win], the first stage effect is executed for the first count part of the big win count display, and during the b time saving state controlled after the first big win 2nd stage production (V change production, WIN production) is executed for the 2nd count part of the big hit count display at a different timing than during the [2nd big hit] (10Ra time-saving big hit via short time small hit) may be

(1) to (3) are shown below as an example of execution timing for executing the second stage effect for the big hit count display.
(1) Jackpot round period during [1st jackpot] (for example, timing immediately after the first stage production)
(2) Jackpot ending period during [1st jackpot] (3) Period controlled to b time saving state after [1st jackpot] (for example, b time saving 1st variation)

For example, in the case of (1) described above, if a “symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot” occurs at the first hit, the first stage effect is executed for the first count part of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot]. After that, the second stage effect may be executed for the second count part of the big win count display.

That is, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit" that is controlled to the b time-saving state after the big hit occurs, the next big hit is substantially confirmed, so the [second big hit] actually occurs. However, at the time of [first big win], the second stage performance may be executed together with the first stage performance for the big win count display.

[Example of production when a big hit with a big hit occurrence count value of 3 occurs]
When the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is controlled to [Dream RUSH], the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 "10Ra time-saving jackpot via short-time small hit" is generated. 9-57 to FIG. 9-59.

Fig. 9-57 shows the case where a "10Ra time-saving big hit via a short-time small-hit" with a big-hit occurrence count value = 3 is generated when [Dream RUSH] is controlled with the big-hit occurrence count value = 2. FIG. 9-58 and FIG. 9-59 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect related to . It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation image relevant when the big hit of "10Ra time-saving big hit via time-saving small-hit" with value=3 occurs.

In this example, when the effect mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH] with the big hit occurrence count value = 2, the display result is "time-saving small hit" ("time-saving small hit 10Ra time-saving big hit"), variation pattern is a ``super reach A time-saving small win'', a V prize is generated in the small win, the game is controlled to a big win game state, and the big win occurrence count value is 3 in this big win game state. (Mode switching determination value). Also, it is assumed that the big win count display corresponding to the state of the big win occurrence count value=2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (1), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in a state where the big hit occurrence count value is 2 and the effect mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH]. At this timing (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-57), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decoration pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count portion and the second count portion are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count portion and the reaching portion are displayed in the initial mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (2), at the timing (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-57) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5. A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the first decoration pattern ("7" in this example) in the areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small design display area 5l corresponding to the design display area 5L in which the first decoration design is stopped and displayed, and in the small design display area 5r corresponding to the design display area 5R in which the first decoration design is stop-displayed, The small patterns are continuously variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (3), at the timing (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-57) to develop super reach in the variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 executes the challenge production, and the image The entire screen of the display device 5 is caused to display the characters "BOMB CHALLENGE" and an image simulating a rock.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the screen of the image display device 5 to display the variable display of the reduced first decorative pattern in a mode in which the variable display of the first decorative pattern that has been executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is reduced. I have it running on the top left.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 counts the big hits from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is determined to erase the big win count display in the changing effect determination process (see FIG. 9-47). Clear the display 02TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58(4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge effect, and the entire screen of the image display device 5 displays "Explode rocks and get a big win!!" and an image simulating a rock are displayed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58(5), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge effect, and displays the ally character performing the action of throwing the bomb on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ( timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the challenge effect, and displays an image simulating a bomb exploding on the entire screen of the image display device 5. (Timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a success effect of the challenge effect, and an image ( In this example, the characters "success" and a friendly character making a peace sign) are displayed (timing T7 shown in FIG. 9-57).

Next, at the timing (timing T8 shown in FIG. 9-57) at which the decoration pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display that the teammate character has succeeded in the challenge. In the state where the image shown is displayed, the first decorative pattern combination ("777" in this example) indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Let At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is continuously executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination of the finalized first decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is the "time-saving small hit" is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

Next, the contents shown in FIGS. 9-59 (9) and (10) are the same as the contents shown in FIGS. 9-56 (18) and (19) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (11), when the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game is opened, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is within a predetermined valid period. At the timing when the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-57), the effect control CPU 120 displays the occurrence of a big hit in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, " "V") is displayed. At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the big hit occurrence count value from 2 to 3 in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 9-24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the message " 3 consecutive wins!!" is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count portion and the second count portion are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count portion and the reaching portion are displayed in the initial mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small hit game state and starts the big hit game state (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 9-57), for effect control The CPU 120 moves the big hit count display 02TM300 to the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes V change effect for the third count portion to set the third count portion to the initial state (white letters of "V"). to the first change mode ("V" in red).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display (in this example, characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, In the lower right portion of the screen, a display of the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 03300") corresponding to the present number of awarded balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (13), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect for the third count portion, and sets the third count portion to the first change mode (red letter "V"). ) to the second change mode (“WIN” in red letters) (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 9-57).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the given current A display of the number of prize balls (characters of "TOTAL 03330" in this example) corresponding to the number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (14), the effect control CPU 120 executes the reaching part change effect for the reaching part, and changes the reaching part from the initial mode (white characters of "PREMIUM FEVER") to the changing mode. (“PREMIUM FEVER” in red letters) (timing of T14 shown in FIG. 9-57). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays two types of teammate characters on the left side and the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 .

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) corresponding to the round currently being executed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the given current A display of the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (in this example, characters of "TOTAL 03360") is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (15), the effect control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 9-57). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an arrival jackpot display (in this example, "PREMIUM FEVER ”) is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the round display corresponding to the round currently being executed (in this example, the characters “Round 4”) to be displayed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the given current A display of the number of prize balls (characters of "TOTAL 03450" in this example) corresponding to the number of prize balls is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the big hit game state (timing of T16 shown in FIG. 9-57), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot end designation command displays the characters "READY" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "super-high-speed HYPER RUSH" will start (that the "rush fluctuation" will start).

[Example of production when a normal small hit occurs]
Concerning an example of an effect when a "normal small win" small win occurs when the big win occurrence count value = 2 is controlled to [Dream RUSH], and the V prize cannot be won in this small win. , and FIGS. 9-60 to 9-62.

Fig. 9-60 shows that a "normal small win" small win occurs when the "dream RUSH" is controlled with the big win occurrence count value = 2, and the V prize cannot be won in this small win. FIG. 9-61 and FIG. 9-62 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case of " FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a case where a small hit of "normal small win" occurs and V winning cannot be achieved in this small win.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH] with the big hit occurrence count value = 2, the display result is "normal small hit" and the variation pattern is "super reach B normal small hit". It is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the V prize is not generated in the small hit, and the control is performed in the normal state. Also, it is assumed that the big win count display corresponding to the state of the big win occurrence count value=2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (1), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in a state where the big hit occurrence count value=2 and the effect mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH]. At this timing (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-60), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decoration pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count portion and the second count portion are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count portion and the reaching portion are displayed in the initial mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, a triangular object including "!" and "WARNING ”) is displayed (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-60).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (3), at the timing (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-60) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 is the screen center of the image display device 5 The fall suggestive display 02TM400 is erased from the part, and the first decoration pattern ("2" in this example) is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, thereby setting the reach state. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small design display area 5l corresponding to the design display area 5L in which the first decoration design is stopped and displayed, and in the small design display area 5r corresponding to the design display area 5R in which the first decoration design is stop-displayed, The small patterns are continuously variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (4), at the timing (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-60) to develop into super reach in the variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 executes a fall fanning production, With the ready-to-win state established in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, the special pattern (in this example, the decoration pattern of the characters "END") is temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C. The special symbol at this time is displayed in a display mode with a high transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 50%), and is a display mode that suggests that the game has temporarily stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 counts the jackpot from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the decision to erase the jackpot count display in the changing effect determination process (see FIG. 9-47). Clear the display 02TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "Destroy!" The display 02TM31B is displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (6), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-60), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol display area 5C. , a special symbol indicating that the display result is a "normal small win" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is continuously executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-60), the effect control for receiving the symbol confirmation designation command The CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the determined first decorative symbols ("2 [END] 2" in this example) indicating that the display result is "normal small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. . At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("222" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small hit game state (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-60), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit start designation command , to display the result image on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . This result image is an image including a display of the total number of awarded balls (“TOTAL 03000” in this example) and teammate characters.

In this small winning game state, the activation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the first opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 0.04 seconds, so it is extremely difficult to win a V prize. Also in this example, it is assumed that the small winning game state has ended without the occurrence of the V prize.

Next, the content shown in FIG. 9-62(9) is the same as the content shown in FIG. 9-49(5), so the description is omitted.

[Firing interval and pending digestion speed]
In this embodiment, when the player operates the batted ball operation handle 30, a game ball can be shot from the batted ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area enters (wins) the starting winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted, and the reserved information is stored as Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern is executed. In addition, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12 is set. done.

Therefore, the greater the number of game balls that are shot from the ball shooting device and hit into the game area per time, the more chances of the game balls to enter the starting prize opening, resulting in a big win (small win). Since the chances of lottery, such as whether or not the game is played, are increased, it is possible to provide the game in a more advantageous state for the player.

However, in a pachinko game machine, it is prohibited to shoot 101 or more game balls from the ball shooting device in 60 seconds. That is, it is possible to shoot up to 100 game balls from the hitting ball shooting device in 60 seconds. In order to maximize the number of game balls hit into the game area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are shot from the hit ball shooting device in 60 seconds. When this configuration is employed, the shooting interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds per game ball (seconds/piece).

In addition, in order to generate a starting prize by hitting the game ball into the game area, it is necessary to make the game ball enter the starting prize opening. Since this pachinko game machine has a winning ball device (for example, a variable winning ball device) that forms a starting winning hole (for example, a second starting winning hole) that can change between a closed state and an open state, When entering the game ball into the second start winning hole, it is necessary to follow the steps (1) to (3) shown below.
(1) Passing through the passage gate → lottery for normal symbols (2) Display result of normal symbols is “normal design hit” → Open variable winning ball device (3) Entering variable winning ball device in open state Further , (X) The surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the direction and speed of the game ball, and (Y) The game ball does not enter any of the winning openings. , Since it is taken into the out port provided at the bottom of the game area, it is virtually impossible for all the game balls that have been shot to clear the steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting winning port. is impossible.

Therefore, when the shooting interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, considering the above-mentioned (X) and (Y), and the steps (1) to (4), the start winning opening of the game ball The entry interval (hereinafter referred to as “winning interval” as appropriate) is 0.6+α (α>0) seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display in which the special symbols corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the currently executed variable display (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) ), the variable display of the next reserved memory is started at the timing when a period (variable display period) for performing variable display of special patterns and a pattern fixing period corresponding to this variable display have passed. Hereinafter, the period until the start of the next pending storage, which is the combination of the variable display period and the symbol fixing period, is appropriately referred to as the "suspended digestion period".

<Relationship table between firing interval and pending digestion period>
FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and pending digestion periods in this embodiment. In FIG. 9-63, the shooting interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate.), the variable display period, the symbol determination period, and the pending digestion period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate) and , and the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, when the player operates the ball operating handle 30, 100 game balls are shot from the ball shooting device in 60 seconds and hit into the right game area. A description will be given of the case where the game ball wins the second start winning hole.

((A) When the variable display period is <0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 9-63(A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display period is extremely short (shorter than 0.2 seconds) variation pattern (variation display period: 0.2 seconds). 05 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, The symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] pending digestion period is 0.55 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]>[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of pending memories in the case of (A))
FIG. 9-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending consumption period, and pending memory count in the case of (A).

In this example, the value of "α" at 0.6+α seconds of the winning interval is a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the winning interval α value corresponding to the first starting winning shown in FIG. 9-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the winning interval α value corresponding to the next starting winning is 1.3 seconds. be. The same is true for FIGS. 9-65 and 9-66.

As shown in FIG. 9-64, in the case of (A), that is, when [Int01]>[Int02], the holding period (0.55 seconds) is longer than the winning interval (0.6+α seconds) Since it is shorter, the pending consumption period is over before a new start-up win occurs. Therefore, the second reserved memory number is "1" only at the timing when the start winning has occurred, but is "0" in other periods.

((B) Variable display period = 0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 9-63(B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a variation pattern with a moderately short variation display period (variation display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected. When the configuration is adopted, the shooting interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, and the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds. and the [Int02] pending digestion period is 0.7 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]≦[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of pending memories in the case of (B))
FIG. 9-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending consumption period, and pending memory count in the case of (B).

As shown in FIG. 9-65, in the case of (B), that is, when [Int01] ≤ [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is longer than the pending digestion period (0.55 seconds) Since it is shorter, a new start-up prize is generated before the end of the pending digestion period. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases with time (the maximum second reserved memory count is "4").

((C) Variable display period > 0.2 seconds)
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with a long variation display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variation display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, The firing interval is 0.6 seconds, [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, and [Int02] the pending digestion period is 1.5 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]<[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of pending memories in the case of (C))
FIG. 9-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending consumption period, and pending memory count in the case of (C).

As shown in FIG. 9-66, in the case of (C), that is, when [Int01]<[Int02], the prize interval (0.6+α seconds) is longer than the pending digestion period (1.5 seconds) Since it is shorter, a new start-up prize is generated before the end of the pending digestion period. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases with time (the maximum second reserved memory count is "4").

As shown in FIG. 9-64, when a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern (variation display period: 0.05 seconds) with an extremely short variation display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, Although it is possible to realize a pachinko game machine with a fast consumption of reserved memory, the second reserved memory cannot be accumulated, so a pre-reading notice for notifying the degree of expectation of a big hit in a variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). The effect or the like cannot be executed, resulting in a decrease in interest in the look-ahead forewarning effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-66, when a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with a long variation display period (variation display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, it is possible to store the second reserved memory. Therefore, although it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect etc. in the variable display before execution, it is not possible to realize a pachinko game machine with a fast consumption of reserved memory. lead to a decline.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-65, when a configuration in which a variation pattern with a moderately short variation display period (variation display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected is adopted, the retention memory digestion speed Since it is possible to accumulate the second reserved memory while realizing a fast pachinko game machine, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect etc. in the variable display before execution, and the point of the pre-reading notice effect and the consumption of the reserved memory. Interest can be improved in terms of speed.

In this way, in a pachinko game machine capable of firing up to 100 game balls from the hitting ball launcher in 60 seconds, as in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], By adopting a configuration with a high rate of execution of the variation pattern of "ultra-high-speed failure" in which the variation display period is 0.2 seconds and the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, the digestion speed of the reserved memory is fast. It is possible to realize a pachinko game machine capable of executing a pre-reading announcement effect or the like in a variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) while realizing the pachinko game machine.

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, and FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, in the time saving state, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the rate at which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high speed loss (0.2 seconds)" whose fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern confirmation stop period of 0.5 seconds is determined by the mode switching judgment of the jackpot occurrence count value. When the value does not reach the value (big hit occurrence count value = 1, 2), the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "super high speed loss (0.2 seconds)" whose fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern confirmation stop period of 0.5 seconds is executed at a higher rate.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-51, 9-55, 9-56, 9-58, and 9-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300 regarding the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value , the display of the number of required jackpots (“X times left until ultra-high-speed HYPERRUSH”) is displayed on the image display device 5 .

According to such a game machine, when the big hit occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value, the fluctuation display period is longer than the time when the mode switching judgment value is not reached (symbol fixing stop period 0.5 seconds). ), the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the time saving state is increased, and the state is further advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the player is controlled to the time-saving state, the player will have a high interest in how many times the jackpot game state is controlled, and will play the game with a desire to continue the jackpot game state. Become. In addition, on the premise that such variable display control is performed, by displaying the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required jackpot count display regarding the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value, the player's interest is increased. It is possible to further improve the interest when the performance information is provided in accordance with the time-saving state and the time-saving state is controlled.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (1) and 9-3 (A1), based on the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when being controlled to the normal state is an even number of symbols When the ``symbol 3R normal jackpot'' is controlled by , after the 3R jackpot game state is completed, the control is performed to the low base state without shifting to the time saving state, and the variation of the decoration pattern executed when the control is to the normal state. When the display result of the display becomes an odd numbered pattern other than 7, when it is controlled to the ``symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot'', after the 10R jackpot game state is finished, it is controlled to the time-saving state a, and then to the normal state. When the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern executed at the time is an odd number pattern of 7, when it is controlled to "symbol 10Rb time saving big hit", it can be controlled to b time saving state after the end of the 10R big win game state. be done.

According to such a gaming machine, based on the variable display executed when being controlled in the normal state, there are cases where the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, and cases where the time saving state is controlled. In addition, when it is controlled to the time saving state, there are times when it is controlled to the time saving state and when it is controlled to the time saving state b, so the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state is the game can draw people's attention.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-51 to 9-52 and FIGS. 9-54 to 9-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when being controlled to the normal state is an odd number of symbols. ("555", "777", etc.), when the 10R jackpot is controlled, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the display of the required number of jackpots are changed by at least one step.

According to such a gaming machine, since the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required jackpot number display mode, the player pays attention to the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the jackpot count display mode. As a result, the aspect of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the display of the number of required jackpots changes based on the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state, so that the interest of the player in the variable display executed in the normal state can be enhanced.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in FIGS. 9-54 to 9-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when being controlled to the normal state was 7 odd numbered symbols ("777"). When the 10R jackpot is controlled based on the above, the mode of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the display of the required number of jackpots is changed by one step, and another step is made during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time saving state. are changing.

According to such a gaming machine, the degree of advantage for the player after the end of the big win game state is associated with the number of stages when the mode of the big win count display 02TM300 or the required number of big wins display changes, whereby the big win count display is performed. 02TM300 and the changes in the display of the number of required jackpots can be further enhanced.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in FIGS. 9-54 to 9-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when being controlled to the normal state was 7 odd numbered symbols ("777"). 3000 prize balls (1500 balls) for the first 10 rounds and substantially fixed prize balls (1500 balls) for the next 10 rounds when the 10R jackpot is controlled based on A 3000 notification effect is being executed, suggesting that the prize balls will be awarded.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game machine is controlled to the big win game state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, 1500 prize balls given in the big win game state and the number of the big win game state. Since it is suggested that a total of 3000 prize balls are given, including 1500 prize balls given in the big hit game state based on the variable display executed in the b time saving state controlled after the end, the b time saving state It is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation before being controlled.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1), the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns executed when the control was performed in the normal state was 7 odd-numbered patterns ("symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot"). When the 10R big hit is controlled based on this, the variable display of the decoration identification information executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the b time saving state [invincible RUSH] after the big win game state. When the display result is controlled to the 3R big win game state based on the fact that the display result becomes odd number patterns other than 7 ("333" etc.) ("symbol 3Rb time saving big hit"), b time saving state after the big win game state is finished. [Invincible RUSH] continues.

According to such a gaming machine, even though it is controlled to the b time saving state, it prevents the end of the b time saving state due to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction with the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite being controlled to the b time saving state, and based on this, it is controlled to the big win game state, the b time saving state By making the control possible, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state regardless of the type of the special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1), the 10R big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when being controlled in the normal state was "symbol 10Rb time-saving big hit" When controlled, the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the b time saving state [invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state is an odd number pattern of 7. When it is controlled to the 10R jackpot game state based on matching ("777" etc.) ("pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), when a normal jackpot occurs and V prize is not won, the normal state is entered. It is controlled to a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] to be controlled.

According to such a game machine, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite being controlled to the b time saving state, and the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that it has become "symbol 10 Ra time saving big hit". When an irregular situation occurs, the player can be expected to be controlled to the jackpot game state irrespective of the type of the special symbol by controlling to the time-saving state a. It should be noted that, when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous by not controlling at least the time saving state b.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, information displayed in the second count section (“V” character, “WIN” character) according to the jackpot occurrence count value>First count section , the display size of the information (the letter "V" and the letter "WIN") is displayed with a large emphasis. In addition, it is possible to increase the light emission brightness in the order of the second count section>the first count section according to the big hit occurrence count value, and it is possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, the mode of the big win count display can indicate the remaining number of times until the big win occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, and the player's interest in the big win count display can be enhanced. .

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, when it is controlled to a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH], the display result is "missing" (missing pattern) Fluctuation display, It is possible to execute the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixing stop period of 0.5 seconds.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-19, at least the number of retained If it is 1 or more, the rate of selecting the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern, and the selection rate of all other variation patterns higher than the sum of

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (including a big win via a minor win).

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, in the variation pattern table referred to when being controlled to the time saving state [dream RUSH], the variation of "super high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" It does not contain random numbers corresponding to the pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to characterize [Dream RUSH] and [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] in the time-saving state by the difference in the variable display period, and the jackpot game state occurs continuously. It is possible to make the player attach importance to this and to make the player realize the peculiarity of the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), in the first variable display when it is first controlled to the time saving state [ultra high speed RUSH], when the display result is "off", the variable display period is The variation display of the variation pattern of 30.2 seconds of “running change failure (rush effect + super high speed failure)” is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (1) and 9-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of “rush fluctuation loss (rush effect + super high speed loss)” continues to be a short time In the fluctuation display when controlled to the state [ultra-high-speed RUSH], any of the fluctuation patterns ("pseudo-fluctuation failure" (2.8 seconds), "ultra-high-speed failure") executed when the display result is "loss" (0.2 seconds), "loss of super reach C" (10 seconds), and "loss of super reach B" (20 seconds)).

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "rush fluctuation failure (rush effect + super high speed failure)", acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect and mode start suggesting effect are executed. .

According to such a game machine, the "rush fluctuation outage" (30.2 seconds), which ensures a longer fluctuation display period than the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high speed outage" (0.2 seconds), creates a time-saving state It can be suggested to the player that he has entered a [super-fast HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in FIGS. 9-17 (1), 9-18 (1), and 9-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of “rush fluctuation failure” (30.2 seconds) is from the fluctuation start to 30 In the first period until seconds elapse, the simulated acceleration variation effect and mode start suggesting effect are executed, and in the second period until 0.7 seconds elapse from the first period, the actual display result is notified. For this purpose, a variable display period (0.2 seconds) and a period (0.5 seconds) for fixing the design are provided.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 9-9 (18) to 9-10 (21), the actual display result in the second period The variable display of the decoration pattern has a presentation mode common to the variable pattern of "ultra-high-speed failure" (0.2 seconds).

According to such a gaming machine, the variation pattern of "rush fluctuation is lost" suggests to the player that it has entered the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], and the actual fluctuation display period is "super high speed failure". ”, you can feel that the variable display period is extremely short from the first variable display after entering the time saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in FIG. 9-6, the unit pseudo-variation display period is gradually changed to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds. is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, in the fluctuation pattern of “running out of fluctuation” (30.2 seconds), fluctuation starts to 30 seconds In the first period until the mode start notification effect is executed after the execution of the pseudo acceleration fluctuation effect.

According to such a game machine, by effectively using the first period from the start of the fluctuation pattern of "running fluctuation out" (30.2 seconds) to the elapse of 30 seconds, a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to recognize that the variable display period will be shortened, and to notify that the transition to the production mode corresponding to the time saving state a [super high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35, in the center area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decoration patterns corresponding to the variable display being executed are used (decoration not stopped). A first look-ahead effect is being executed, in which a fixed icon including characters "HOLD" is superimposed on the pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37, the second look-ahead image (in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the display result of the stop display becomes "time saving small hit" A second look-ahead effect is executed to display a combination of pseudo third decorative symbols (in this example, an image including a part of "777") indicating that the second look-ahead effect is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is “missing”, the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution ratio of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. be. In addition, when the display result is "time-saving small win", the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution ratio of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. Thus, the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (a big win via a small win). In addition, the first suggestive effect that is executed at a relatively high rate is a effect using decorative patterns, and is executed in the pattern display area where the player can easily pay attention, so that a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH ], it is possible to heighten the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state while realizing the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-15)
Of the look-ahead foretelling effects, the pattern enlarging effect has a higher execution ratio than the reserved look-ahead foretelling effect (not shown). Also, the total value (percentage) of the execution ratios of the first look-ahead effect and the enlarging pattern effect is higher than the total value of the execution ratios of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect (not shown). According to such a game machine, it is possible to realize the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in FIG. 9-28, in the a time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative pattern is different from the scrolling up and down direction of the screen, and is directed from the back of the screen to the front. (a mode in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size after being displayed in an enlarged size), and when the variable display of "missing" is continuously performed,
(1) Displayed (enlarged display) in a mode of a larger size and a higher degree of transparency than the third decorative pattern stopped corresponding to the variable display executed immediately before,
(2) Displayed (reduced display) in a manner smaller in size and higher in transparency than the third decorative pattern stopped corresponding to the variable display executed immediately before (3) Displayed in the variable display executed immediately before It is displayed with the same size and the same degree of transparency as the correspondingly stopped third decoration pattern (stopped display).

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display in which the display result is "lost" is continuously executed, the period during which the third decorative pattern is displayed within the player's attention range is set. In addition, since the degree of transparency of the third decoration pattern changes within the range where the player pays attention, the speed of the variable display in the time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] can be felt more strongly. can be done.

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in FIG. 9-28, in the a time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative pattern is different from the scrolling up and down direction of the screen, and is directed from the back of the screen to the front. (a mode in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size after being enlarged), and as a combination of the third decorative pattern when the "missing" variable display is continuously executed,
At the time of (1) described above, the combination of the third decoration pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
At the time of (2) described above, the combination of the third decoration pattern corresponding to the variable display,
At the time of (3) described above, the combination of the third decoration pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (a big win via a small win). In addition, at least a part of the third decorative pattern used for the previously executed "super-high-speed failure" variable display is also used for the later-executed "super-high-speed failure" variable display, so that " To prevent a player from feeling cumbersome due to an excessive amount of performance information presented with the variable display of "super high speed failure" while allowing the player to feel the sense of speed by the variable display of "super high speed failure". there is

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in FIG. 9-28, when it is controlled to the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is the number pattern and the background side of the number pattern. It is composed of a pedestal pattern corresponding to the contour of the numerical pattern and a radial ray effect display added to the front side of the pedestal pattern on the background side of the numerical pattern and displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-26, when it is controlled to the a time saving state [dream RUSH], the first decoration pattern is composed only of number patterns.

According to such a game machine, the decorative patterns are more emphasized in the time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], thereby making it easier to recognize the decorative patterns under a situation where the variable display period is short, and the decorative patterns fluctuate. It is possible to emphasize the sense of speed when displaying.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), when it is controlled to the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of pending memories is 0, "super high speed loss" (0.2 seconds ), it is possible to select a variation pattern of “pseudo variation deviation” (2.8 seconds) having a longer variation display period than the variation pattern of ).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, 9-12 and 9-13, when the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation deviation" (2.8 seconds) is executed, [variation display 0.2 seconds equivalent period + 0.5 seconds equivalent period equivalent to fixed design stop = 0.7 seconds] Unit pseudo fluctuation (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decoration pattern) is executed 4 times. It is running.

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (a big win via a small win). In addition, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the variable display of the "pseudo-variable failure" variation pattern with a long variable display period is performed, thereby avoiding a situation where the variable display is not performed as much as possible. , by showing the player as if the variable display is being executed a plurality of times, the sense of speed in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not spoiled.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), when the number of retained memories is 0 when being controlled to the time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], "pseudo fluctuation deviation" (2.8 seconds ) is higher than the ratio of selecting any other variation pattern, and is higher than the sum of the selection ratios of all other variation patterns.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to avoid impairing the execution frequency and sense of speed of the variable display in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in FIG. 9-15, when the number of retained memories is 0 when being controlled to the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], the variation pattern of "pseudo-fluctuation failure" (2.8 seconds) is It is not selected, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of "Long variation is lost" (10 seconds).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to clarify the characteristics of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation outage" (2.8 seconds) in a time saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], and a time saving state [dream RUSH ], the situation where the variable display is not executed can be avoided as much as possible.

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, it is possible to perform a first logo period change effect for changing the first logo display and a second logo period change effect for changing the second logo display. The change cycle (0.5 s) in the effect is shorter than the change cycle (5 s) in the first logo cycle change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (a big win via a small win). In addition, in the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], in which the variation display of the variation pattern of “super-high speed loss” is performed at a high rate, the frequency of changing the second logo display mode is high, resulting in a time-saving state [ HYPER RUSH] can be emphasized.

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, it is possible to execute a first logo cycle change effect for changing the first logo display and a second logo cycle change effect for changing the second logo display. The light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

According to such a gaming machine, the display of the first logo notifies that it is controlled to the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], and indicates that the area where the player should shoot the game ball is the right game area. In addition, the second logo display notifies that it is controlled to a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], and the area where the player should shoot the game ball is the right game area It is possible to notify that it is.

(Effect 02-24)
When it is controlled to the time saving state [Dream RUSH], the first system display can be displayed on the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning opening. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image for making the player enter the second starting winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

In addition, when it is controlled to the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to display the second system display in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning opening. be. The second system display is a moving image including the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image for making the player enter the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

The arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, the first system display and the second system display inform the player of the area where the game ball should be shot, and the variable display period is shortened in the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH]. can be emphasized more.

(Effect 02-25)
a When it is controlled to the time saving state [Dream RUSH], the second holding display corresponding to the second holding storage number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular circular shapes that rotate. It is possible to display the first rotation correspondence display as a moving image of the object.

Also, when it is controlled to the time saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed rotate. It is possible to display the second rotation corresponding display as a moving image of the circular object to be rotated.

The rotation cycle of the second rotation correspondence display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation cycle of the first rotation correspondence display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

According to such a game machine, by rotating the corresponding display (hold display, active display), it is recognized that it is controlled to the a time saving state, and is controlled to the a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH]. When it is on, the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the time saving state [Dream RUSH], so that the shortness of the variable display period can be emphasized more.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in Figure 9-14, in a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], when the variation display of the variation pattern of “direct jackpot” where the display result is “jackpot” is executed, the design matching effect The jackpot round game is started with the start of the jackpot game state without execution.

According to such a game machine, when the display result is "missing" during the period controlled in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. , the player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (a big win via a small win). In addition, in the a time saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible not to stop and display the decorative symbols when being controlled to the big win game state, so the flow of the game from the variable display to the big win game state is not interrupted. It is possible to give the impression of being suddenly controlled to the big win game state by emphasizing the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the big win game state.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the time-saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when the variable display is executed in which the display result is “time-saving small hit”, the pattern matching effect is executed, and the pattern display area In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of the third decorative symbols indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small win" is stopped/determined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-14, in the time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], when the display result is "big hit" (not including the big hit via the small hit), when the variation display is executed, The pattern matching effect is not executed, and the combination of the third decorative patterns is not displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

According to such a gaming machine, during the time period during which the a time saving state [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the display result is "loss", a very short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the execution of the variable display that does not result in a "big win" (including a big win via a small win). In addition, in the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], when the variable display is executed in which the display result is "time-saving small hit", the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area, so that the flow of the game can be clarified to make the player pay attention to playing the game so that the game ball passes through the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, when the variable display with the display result as "big win" is executed, the third decoration pattern is not stopped and displayed, so that the flow of the game from the variable display to the big win game state is not interrupted, and the big win game state is triggered. By highlighting the speediness of the variable display, it is possible to give the impression of being suddenly controlled to a big win game state.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) and 9-16 (2), in the time saving state [dream RUSH], when the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A big hit" is executed, and based on the fact that the display result is a "big hit", a success effect including pattern matching effect is executed, and the display result is "time-saving small hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of the first decorative symbols indicating that the winning combination is stopped is displayed/determined.

According to such a gaming machine, the difference between the time-saving state [dream RUSH] and the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is clarified by the difference in the display of the decoration pattern, and the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is displayed. In , it is possible to create a special feeling when the display result is a "big hit".

(Effect 02-29)
Either when a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH] or when the big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH] Also in the case of , the fanfare performance execution period (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the big hit symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) (not shown).

According to such a game machine, when it is controlled to a time saving state [dream RUSH] and when it is controlled to a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH], special variable after the start of the jackpot game state To make it possible to shorten the period until the winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state, and to prevent the player from waiting for the period until the awarding of the prize balls after the notification of the display result. be able to. In particular, in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], control is performed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, A player can be shown a series of flow from the start of variation to the transition to a big winning round game.

(Effect 02-30)
A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and in a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH] and b time saving state [invincible RUSH], the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" , the special variable winning ball device 7 can be illuminated (not shown) at the timing controlled to the big winning game state.

When it is controlled in the time saving state, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is high, and there are many situations where the display result is determined to be a "minor win", thereby causing a big win. However, if the display result is determined to be a "jackpot" while the time-saving state is being controlled, the player feels disappointed that it would have been better to have won the prize in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is determined to be a "big hit", so information indicating that a big hit has occurred (characters of "Aim for the attacker!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the game player's consciousness is directed from the image display device 5 to the big winning opening by lighting the special variable winning ball device 7, and the big winning is generated when the display result is judged as "big winning". You can reduce the feeling of regret for what you have done.

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, (2A) a change sign effect in which a wave effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (2B) the movable body 02TM100 is at its initial position→maximum effect. (2C) a character appearance effect in which the friendly character 02TM30B related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; A second response display that changes the display mode of the response display (normal mode→red mode) by executing a second action effect in which the ally character throws three bombs against the response display (active display, pending display). A series of second change performances composed of a change performance (second action change performance) is executed.

According to such a game machine, the movable body 02TM100, the image (ally character 02TM30B) related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100, and the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) are linked to perform the second action change effect. Of these, the second effect effect and the second corresponding display change effect out of the second effect change effect are executed, so that only the effect that acts on the corresponding display or the effect that the corresponding display changes is executed. Compared to , it is possible to improve interest when the corresponding display changes.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in FIGS. 9-29 to 9-31 and 9-58, the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 and the friendly character appearing in the super reach A production (challenge production) are common characters. ing. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who succeeds in the challenge in the success effect in the challenge effect are common characters. Also, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character appearing in the Super Reach D effect (battle effect) are common characters. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who wins over the enemy character in the victory effect in the battle effect are common characters (not shown).

According to such a game machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the teammate character displayed on the image display device 5 makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the series of performances, and the player can recognize the teammate character. It is possible to make the player recognize that the character is an important character, and to make the player have a strong interest in and familiarity with the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, when the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) changes to the red mode, the first The ratio (95%, 90%) at which the change effect or the second change effect is executed is the ratio (20 %).

As shown in FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, (1A) a change sign effect in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (1B) the movable body 02TM100 is in its initial position→intermediate effect. (1C) a character appearance effect in which a friendly character 02TM30B related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; a first response display change effect (first action change effect) for changing the display mode of the correspondence display by executing a first effect effect in which the ally character throws one bomb at the correspondence display. A series of first change effects are executed.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to diversify the effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display, and at the same time, when the movable body 02TM100 is operated, the user is expected to execute the first action effect. can let

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, in the first change effect, (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first 1 action change effect) is being executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, in the second change effect, (2D) a second corresponding display change effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding display by executing the second action effect (Second action change effect) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, when the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) changes to the red mode, the first The ratio (50% to 80%) of executing the second change effect is higher than the ratio (15% to 40%) of executing the first change effect.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to diversify the action effects of throwing a bomb by the friend character against the correspondence display, and to draw attention to the characters appearing in the action effects. In addition, by executing an action effect in which a friendly character with high visibility throws a bomb at the correspondence display, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the correspondence display will change to a more expected mode.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in FIG. 9-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate effect position to the initial position, the character appearance effect (1C) of the first change effect is executed, and the image display device 5 In the center of the screen, an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-32(4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum effect position to the initial position, the character appearance effect (2C) of the second change effect is executed, and the image is displayed. An ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5 .

According to such a game machine, it is possible to emphasize the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B, and to make the production effect of the ally character stand out through the cooperation between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B. .

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, (1A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (1B) the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position→ (1C) A character appearance effect is performed in which a friend character 02TM30B related to the friend character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. After being executed, (1D) a first action production in which the ally character throws one bomb at the correspondence display is executed, thereby changing the display mode of the correspondence display (first action change effect) is being executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, (2A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (2B) the movable body 02TM100 is initialized. A maximum action effect is executed in the order of position→maximum effect position→initial position. After the effect is executed, (2D) a second action effect in which the friendly character throws three bombs at the corresponding display is executed, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display (second correspondence display change effect (second 2 action change effect) is being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the change portent effect can make the player expect the action of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of the teammate character. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the first action presentation and the second action presentation is executed.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) control to the jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", and (ii) the display result of the variable display is " A small winning game state is set based on the fact that a small winning has occurred, a state in which a game medium can enter a V winning area in a V winning device is established, and a big winning is achieved based on the entry of the game medium into the V winning area. The gaming machine is equipped with a [2 types of jackpot] that controls the gaming state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment shows an example of a [first type + two types mixed machine] having a pattern of [first type jackpot] and [two types jackpot] as a pattern to control to (i + ii) jackpot game state. However, without being limited to such a form, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to gaming machines having different game characteristics.

For example, you may apply the production|presentation shown to said embodiment with respect to the gaming machine which has the game nature of [V probability variable machine]. In [V probability variation machine], a normal state that is a low probability state and a probability variation state that is a high probability state (game state in which probability variation control is executed) shall be provided. In addition, as the variable probability state, a variable probability state and a variable probability b state shall be provided. As the types of jackpots, "normal jackpot" in which variable probability control is not executed, "a variable probability big win" in which variable probability control is executed, and "b variable probability big win" in which variable probability b control is executed are provided. A table to be referred to when judging a jackpot type is differentiated according to the type of the variable probability state.

In the variable probability state, although the next big hit is fixed, it becomes a "variable probability big hit" at a rate of 75% and a "normal big hit" at a rate of 25%. On the other hand, in the variable probability state b, the next big hit is decided, and it becomes a "variable probability big hit" at a rate of 100%. For example, in the variable a probability state, ``10R variable probability big hit'' occurs at a rate of 75%, and ``normal jackpot with no ball output'' at a rate of 25%, and in the variable probability state ``10R variable probability big hit'' at a rate of 100%. That is, although the next big hit is confirmed in the time-saving state a, the percentage of the time-saving state that the prize ball is actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the big hit is 75%, while the next big hit is confirmed in the time-saving state b. 100% of the players actually receive the prize balls and the time-saving state continues after the big hit.

For example, the following jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types based on the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal state. Any jackpot type also differs in content regarding execution or non-execution of time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state and execution or non-execution of probability variable control (a probability variable control, b probability variable control).
(X1) "3R normal jackpot" (40%)
Time saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed (X2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (40%)
Time saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed (X3) "10Rb probability variable jackpot" (20%)
Time saving control is executed, and b probability variable control is also executed

The following jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types based on the variable display of the second special symbols in the variable probability state.
(Y1) "Normal jackpot without balls" (25%)
Time saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed (Y2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (75%)
Time saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed

The following jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types based on the variable display of the second special symbols in the variable probability state.
(Z1) “10Ra probability variable jackpot” (100%)
Time saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed

In such a [V probability variable machine] game machine, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, the example in which the jackpot count display is displayed in a predetermined period of the jackpot game state or the time saving state is shown, but not limited to such a form, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the jackpot game state. , or may be displayed in a period different from the predetermined period of the time-saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or the ending period of the jackpot gaming state, or may be displayed during the period after developing into the time-saving state of super reach.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "normal small hit" while being controlled to the b time saving state, "high speed normal Although an example in which the variation display of the variation pattern of "small hit" is executed has been shown, this is not limited to such a form, and when the display result is "normal small hit" while being controlled in the b time saving state In addition, a variable display of a variable pattern in an effect mode different from the variable pattern of "high speed loss" may be executed.

For example, when the display result is "normal small win" while being controlled to the b time saving state, a variation pattern of "long normal small win" may be provided. The fluctuation pattern of this "long normal small hit" is that the fluctuation display period is 10000 ms, and the special pattern S (decorative pattern including the characters "SAFE") is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5. , it may be notified that a "normal small hit" has occurred in the b time saving state. By notifying that the normal small win has occurred in the b time saving state, the game state in which the normal small win occurs is better in the b time saving state instead of the a time saving state in which the game state falls to the normal state. can be given, and the special feeling of the b time saving state can be further enhanced.

(4) In the above embodiment, when changing the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) to the blue mode or the red mode, it is possible to change to either the first change effect or the second change effect. However, it is not limited to such a form, and when changing the display mode of the corresponding display to the blue mode or the red mode, it is possible to change only one of the first change effect and the second change effect. A configuration that allows

For example, when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to the blue mode at a rate of 100%, and when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed at a rate of 100%. may be changed to a red color. Further, even when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed, and even when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "normal small hit" while being controlled in the a time saving state, V winning is extremely difficult in the small win game state. , The example of falling to the normal state without being controlled to the big hit game state has been shown, but the display result is "normal small hit" when it is controlled to the time saving state. In such a case, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which V winning is easy in the small winning game state, and to fall to the normal state after controlling to the big winning game state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small hit", the opening of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in the second opening pattern to generate a big hit and win 10 rounds worth of prize balls (1500 pieces). shall be granted. However, in the "normal small hit" in this case, it shall be controlled to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to award the prize ball even in the normal small win, so that the player can reduce the regret of being controlled to the normal state after the big win game state.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1,500 prize balls are awarded at the time of the first hit, and 1,500 prizes are awarded even in the jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. An example in which balls are given is shown, but not limited to such a form, when a "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls are given at the time of the first time, and b Time saving state Less than 1500 prize balls may be awarded in a jackpot that occurs at

For example, when a ``symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot'' occurs at the first hit, 1500 prize balls are given at the first hit, and 1000 prize balls are given at the big hit occurring during the b time-saving state. In this case, at the first hit, a 2500 notification effect may be executed to notify that a total of 2500 (1500+1000) prize balls will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, in the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect, the display size of the third decorative pattern is the same display size, and the speed of the unit pseudo fluctuation is increased. Not limited to this, in the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation may be increased with a different display size of the third decoration pattern.

For example, in the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, the display size of the third decorative pattern may be increased or the display size of the third decorative pattern may be decreased as the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variation display of the "straight hit" variation pattern is being executed, the third decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are hidden while the small symbols are displayed. Although an example in which small patterns are displayed in the display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form. The third decoration patterns of 5L, 5C and 5R may be hidden, and the small patterns of the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) is performed only when it is controlled to [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH]. , Not limited to such a form, when the effect mode different from [super high speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the variation display of the variation pattern of "super high speed loss" may be executed.

For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration that can execute the variable display of the variable pattern of "ultra-high-speed failure" when it is controlled by [Dream RUSH]. In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern of "super-high-speed failure" is selected when controlled to [Dream RUSH] is the same as the variation pattern of "super-high-speed failure" when controlled to [super-high-speed HYPER RUSH]. shall be lower than the rate at which is selected.

In addition, during a predetermined period of time under control of [Dream RUSH], the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "super-high-speed failure" can be executed, which is different from the predetermined period of time under control of [Dream RUSH]. In the period, a configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" cannot be executed.

For example, in the period of 1st to 50th fluctuations when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high speed deviation" can be executed, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH] In the period after the fifty-first variation, the variation display of the variation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" is disabled.

(10) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode switching determination value is set to 3 has been shown, but the mode switching determination value may be set to a value different from 3 without being limited to such a form.

For example, the mode switching determination value may be set to 5, which is larger than 3, or may be set to 2, which is smaller than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [dream RUSH], and based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH] An example was shown in which the execution period (0.1 seconds) of the fanfare effect is shorter than the period (0.5 seconds) of the design determination period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot design in either case of the occurrence of a big hit. Not limited to this form, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], and when the big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH] In either case, the period during which the fanfare effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the symbol for the big win is determined.

For example, a case where a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH] and a case where a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH] In either case, by setting the period for finalizing the design of the jackpot design to 0.5 seconds and the execution period of the fanfare performance to 1.0 second, the execution period of the fanfare performance is longer than the design determination period of the big-hit design. become longer.

(12) In the above embodiment, when it is controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], at least the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and the display result is determined to be "off", " The rate of selecting the variation pattern of "super fast deviation" (0.2 seconds) is about 90% (900/997), and the rate of selecting any other variation pattern is about 10% (97/997) , the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "ultra-fast deviation" (0.2 seconds) is much higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern. Although not limited to such a form, the rate of selecting the "ultra-fast deviation" (0.2 seconds) variation pattern is much higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern. It does not have to be selected by percentage.

For example, when it is controlled to a time saving state [super high speed HYPER RUSH], at least the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and if the display result is determined to be "missing", "super high speed missing" (0. 2 seconds) is 25%, and the rate of selecting variation pattern A to variation pattern D as other variation patterns is around 20% and may be less than 25% ( 100% in total).

The characteristic portion 02TM described above includes the following configurations.

The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
Production execution means for executing production (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-saving state), when the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number of times (mode switching judgment value = "2", which is 1 less than 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value ≥ 3) ), the ratio of variable display with a variable display period shorter than a predetermined period (variable display of a “super high speed loss (0.2 seconds)” variation pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds) is executed, When the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times ("2", which is 1 less than the mode switching determination value = 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2), a variable display of a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period ( Higher than the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern) is executed,
In the special state, when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times, the effect execution means provides a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, " A gaming machine capable of displaying on the display means "X times left until ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH").

According to such a game machine, when the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds the predetermined number of times, the variable display period is less likely to be shorter than the predetermined period than when the predetermined number of times is not exceeded. Since it becomes higher, the frequency with which the variable display is performed in the special state is increased, and the state becomes even more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the player is controlled to the special state, the player will have a high interest in how many times the advantageous state is controlled, and will play the game with a desire to maintain the advantageous state continuously. Further, on the premise that such variable display control is performed, by displaying a specific display regarding the number of times the advantageous state is controlled until the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number of times. , performance information that meets the interest of the player is provided, and the interest can be further improved when the special state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine of means 1,
As the special state (time saving state), there are a first special state (a time saving state) and a second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) that is more advantageous for the player than the first special state,
The variable display means includes decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific display result (combination of decoration patterns that become a big hit pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
As the specified display results, a first specified display result (a combination of even-numbered symbols), a second specified display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols excluding 7) different from the first specified display result, and the first a third specified display result (combination of 7 patterns) different from any of the specified display result and the second specified display result;
The state control means is
When the advantageous state (symbol 3R normal jackpot) is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed during the control to the normal state being the first specific display result. , without controlling to the special state after the end of the advantageous state (controlling to the low base state without shifting to the time saving state after the end of the 3R jackpot game state);
When the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the second specific display result, and is controlled to the advantageous state (symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot). , can be controlled to the first special state after the end of the advantageous state (can be controlled to the time-saving state a after the end of the 10R jackpot game state),
When the advantageous state (symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot) is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed during the control to the normal state being the third specific display result. , It is possible to control to the second special state after the end of the advantageous state (It is possible to control to the b time saving state after the end of the 10R jackpot game state)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases in which the special state is not controlled after the advantageous state ends, and in which the special state is controlled, based on the variable display executed during control to the normal state. Furthermore, when the special state is controlled, there are times when the control is performed in the first special state and when it is controlled in the second special state. It can draw the player's attention.

The game machine of means 3 is
A game machine of means 2,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time saving state, b time saving state) and the advantageous state,
The production executing means is
When the number of times is updated, the aspect of the specific display can be changed step by step (the jackpot count display 02TM300 can be updated step by step from the first step to the third step, and , it is possible to update the remaining number of "X times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH"),
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the second specific display result or the third specific display result (combination of odd-numbered patterns). A gaming machine characterized in that, when controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot), it is possible to change the mode of the specific display by at least a predetermined step (one step).

According to such a gaming machine, since the number of times of continuous control in an advantageous state and the mode of the specific display are related, the player pays attention to the mode of the specific display, and in the normal state. Since the aspect of the specific display changes based on the display result of the executed variable display, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state.

The game machine of means 4 is
A game machine of means 3,
When the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the third specific display result (seven patterns are complete), when the advantageous state is controlled, Control to the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the second specific display result (odd-numbered symbols excluding 7). The ratio of control to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state is higher than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state (a time saving state is usually small When a hit occurs and the V prize is not won, it is controlled to the normal state, but in the b time saving state, even if a small hit occurs and the V prize is not won, the control is not performed to the normal state, so the next big win is possible. almost certain)
The effect execution means is configured to perform the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the third specific display result (seven patterns are complete). , the mode of the specific display is changed in more stages than the predetermined stage (updated by one stage during the jackpot game state with 7 patterns aligned, b) The next jackpot based on the variable display executed in the time saving state It is possible to update one more step during the game state)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, by associating the degree of advantage for the player after the end of the advantageous state with the number of stages when the mode of the specific display changes, interest in the change in the mode of the specific display is further increased. can be done.

The game machine of means 5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
Control to the advantageous state (10R big hit) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the third specific display result (seven patterns are complete). If it is, it is possible to give a predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on the winning to the big winning mouth) in the advantageous state, and the special state after the advantageous state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH), when the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is controlled based on the variable display executed, the predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning in the big winning opening) is given in the advantageous state. is possible and
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed during the control to the normal state being the third specific display result. and a game machine capable of executing a giving effect (3000 notification effect displaying characters "3000 FEVER") suggesting that the predetermined game value is given a plurality of times (1500×2 times).

According to such a gaming machine, when the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the predetermined game value given in the advantageous state and the game value to be controlled after the advantageous state ends. Since it is suggested that the game value including the predetermined game value given in an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state is given, the expectation of the player is heightened before being controlled to the special state. can be increased.

The game machine of means 6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
As the variable display means, special identification information variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) capable of executing variable display of special identification information (special symbol), decoration identification information (decoration a decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of symbols),
The decoration identification information variable display means can execute the variable display of the decoration identification information on the display means (image display device 5) corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
As special identification information, there are first special identification information (first special design) and second special identification information (second special design),
When being controlled to the normal state, the condition for starting variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the condition for starting variable display of the second special identification information (normal state (low base) state), the starting condition of the first special symbol is more likely to be established than the starting condition of the second special symbol),
When being controlled to the special state, the condition for starting the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be established than the condition for starting the variable display of the first special identification information (time saving state (high base state), the starting condition of the second special symbol is more likely to be established than the starting condition of the first special symbol),
The state control means controls the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the third specific display result (seven patterns are complete). When controlled to (10R jackpot), the decoration executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot game state) based on the second specific display result (the odd numbered symbols other than 7), the advantageous state is reached. It is possible to control the second special state after the end (b time saving state (invincible RUSH) can be continued)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the special state is prevented from ending due to execution of the variable display of the first special identification information even though the special state has been controlled. It is possible to prevent dissatisfaction with the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite being controlled to the second special state, and based on this, the control is made to the advantageous state, the second special state may occur. By enabling control to a special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of expectation for being controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The game machine of means 7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
As the variable display means, special identification information variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) capable of executing variable display of special identification information (special symbol), decoration identification information (decoration decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of symbols),
The decoration identification information variable display means can execute the variable display of the decoration identification information on the display means (image display device 5) corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
As special identification information, there are first special identification information (first special design) and second special identification information (second special design),
When being controlled to the normal state, the condition for starting variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the condition for starting variable display of the second special identification information (normal state (low base) state), the starting condition of the first special symbol is more likely to be established than the starting condition of the second special symbol),
When being controlled to the special state, the condition for starting the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be established than the condition for starting the variable display of the first special identification information (time saving state (high base state), the starting condition of the second special symbol is more likely to be established than the starting condition of the first special symbol),
The state control means controls the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state is the third specific display result (seven patterns are complete). When controlled to (10R jackpot), the decoration executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state When the advantageous state (10R jackpot game state) is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result or the third specific display result (seven odd-numbered symbols are arranged). and after the end of the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the first special state (a time-saving state: a time-saving state that is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and V prize is not won). game machine.

According to such a gaming machine, the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite being controlled to the second special state, and based on the second specific display result or the third specific display result. By enabling control to at least the first special state in the event of an irregular situation in which the information is controlled to an advantageous state due to the special identification information, there is an expectation that the information will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of the special identification information. can be ensured. It should be noted that, when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous by preventing the control from entering at least the second special state.

The game machine of means 8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The specific display (jackpot count display) is divided into a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count part is emphasized) and a mode emphasized more than the first emphasis mode (higher visibility than the first emphasis mode). ) second emphasis mode (a mode in which the first count part and the second count part are emphasized), and can be displayed on the display means,
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
when the number of times does not exceed the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first emphasis mode;
When the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value=2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasis mode. game machine.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the number of times of continuous control to an advantageous state by the mode of the specific display exceeds a predetermined number of times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific display. can be done.

The game machine of means 9 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) , and
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which a display result becomes a predetermined display result (failure pattern) different from the specific display result when being controlled to the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), wherein the variable display period However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display ("ultra high speed lag (0.2 seconds)" whose variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern) can be executed,
Among the variable displays that are executed when the display result is the predetermined display result, the ratio of the special variable display that is executed while being controlled to the special state is different from the special variable display. (At least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate of selecting the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern high, higher than the sum of the selection percentages of all other variation patterns)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means 10 is
The gaming machine of means 9,
The state control means is controllable to a predetermined state (dream RUSH mode a time saving state) after the end of the advantageous state,
The state control means is controllable to the special state (a time-saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times that the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number of times (2),
The special variable display is not executed in the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: a time-saving state in the dream RUSH mode) ("Super high speed loss (0.2 seconds)" in the variation pattern determination table for loss does not include random numbers corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to characterize the predetermined state and the special state by the difference in the variable display period. It is possible to make the player realize the peculiarity.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
The game machine of means 10,
Equipped with production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production,
The state control means, after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when being controlled to the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1 to 2: dream RUSH mode a time-saving state), the special state (Jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000: a time-saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) can be controlled,
When the variable display means is controlled to the special state based on the variable display executed while being controlled to the predetermined state, the display result becomes the predetermined display result (lost pattern). As a variable display, a special variable display with a variable display period longer than the special variable display (variable display of a "rush fluctuation failure (rush effect + super high speed failure)" variation pattern with a variable display period of 30.2 seconds) is executed. is possible and
The variable display period of the special variable display is when the special state is controlled again after the advantageous state based on the variable display executed while being controlled in the special state (super-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode). a When the time saving state continues), the variable display period of the first variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (loss pattern) (pseudo fluctuation loss (2.8 seconds), super high speed loss ( 0.2 seconds), super reach C deviation (10 seconds), super reach B deviation (20 seconds), any fluctuation pattern) longer than
The effect executing means performs a suggestive effect (acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, mode start suggestive effect) suggesting that the special state is controlled in response to the special variable display (no rush fluctuation (30.2 seconds)). A game machine characterized by being executable.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suggest to the player that the special state has been entered by the special variable display in which a variable display period longer than that of the special variable display is ensured.

The game machine of means 12 is
The gaming machine of means 11,
The effect executing means includes a variable display period of the special variable display (variable display period of 30.2 seconds) and a fixed period from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display (symbol fixed period of 0.2 seconds). 5 seconds), the suggestive effect can be executed in the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation), and the second period after the first period (30 seconds from the start of fluctuation ~ 30.2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (remaining fluctuation display period 0.2 seconds) + pattern confirmation period 0.5 seconds), the same aspect as the special variable display (ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds) fluctuation A game machine characterized in that it is possible to display the predetermined display result (lost pattern) by variably displaying the decorative pattern in a manner common to the pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the special variable display suggests to the player that the special state has been entered, and the special state is not entered although the actual variable display period is not as short as the special variable display. It is possible to realize that the variable display period is extremely short from the first variable display.

The game machine of means 13 is
The gaming machine of means 12,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
The variable display means includes decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means,
The decoration identification information variable display means includes:
Within the variable display period of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed,
In the first period, re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) can be performed a plurality of times, and the variable display period of subsequent re-variable display can be shorter than the variable display period of previous re-variable display. (The acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect that gradually shortens the fluctuation display equivalent period to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds executable),
The effect execution means notifies that the transition to the effect mode corresponding to the special state is performed in the first period (30 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the start of fluctuation) (mode start notification effect after execution of acceleration pseudo-variation effect executable)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a game machine, by effectively using the first period, it is possible to recognize that the variable display period will be shortened when shifting to the special state, and to shift to the production mode corresponding to the special state. can be notified.

The game machine of means 14 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for determining a big hit at the time of start-up winning) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
Production execution means for executing production (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which a display result becomes a predetermined display result (failed pattern) different from the specific display result when being controlled to the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), wherein the variable display period However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display ("ultra high speed lag (0.2 seconds)" whose variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern) can be executed,
Among the variable displays that are executed when the display result is the predetermined display result, which are executed when the special state is controlled, a ratio of the special variable display that is executed is different from the special variable display. (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate of selecting the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (a central area of the screen including the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and a display area closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area. A second display area (area on the screen edge side excluding the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) that is narrower than the area,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a suggestive effect (a first look-ahead effect, a second look-ahead effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state for the reserved memory during variable display prior to the reserved memory. executable in the display means,
The suggestive effect is executed in the first display area, and the first suggestive effect (a fixed icon including the characters "HOLD" in the decorative pattern that is not fixed and stopped using decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display that is being executed) ), and a second suggestive effect that is different from the first suggestive effect and executed in the second display area (a second prefetch image that includes an image with 7 symbols) is displayed. 2 look-ahead production) and,
The execution ratio of the first suggestive effect is higher than the execution ratio of the second suggestive effect (the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In addition, since the first suggestion effect executed at a relatively high rate is a effect using the decoration identification information and is executed in the first display area where the player tends to pay attention, the variable display period in the special state is It is possible to heighten the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state while realizing the shortness of the time.

The game machine of means 15 is
The gaming machine of means 14,
There are a plurality of types of the first suggestive effect (first look-ahead effect, enlarging pattern effect), and a plurality of types of the second suggestive effect (second look-ahead effect, reserved look-ahead effect),
The total execution ratio of all types of the first suggestive effects (the execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect + the execution ratio of the pattern enlarging effect) is the total of the execution ratios of the second suggestive effects of all types (the second look-ahead effect execution ratio + pending look-ahead effect execution ratio), or the execution ratio of any type of the first suggestive effect (execution ratio of the first look-ahead effect) is higher than any type of second A gaming machine characterized in that the execution ratio of the suggestive effect (the execution ratio of the second look-ahead effect, the execution ratio of the reserved look-ahead effect) is higher.

According to such a game machine, the shortness of the variable display period in the special state can be realized.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
The game machine of means 14 or 15,
In the special state (a time-saving state in ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode),
The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is different from the manner in which the decoration identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and the decoration identification information moves from the back to the front of the screen (the manner in which the decoration design suddenly expands). and
A mode in which, when the variable display whose display result is the predetermined display result (defective pattern) is continuously executed, the decoration identification information is larger in size and has a higher degree of transparency than the decoration identification information stopped corresponding to the previous variable display. and, after displaying the decoration identification information corresponding to the subsequent variable display, the size of the decoration identification information is reduced.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display with the predetermined display result is continuously executed, the period during which the decoration identification information is displayed within the player's attention range is lengthened. In addition, since the degree of transparency of the decoration identification information changes within the range where the player is paying attention, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that the variable display is fast in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
and a display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which a display result becomes a predetermined display result (failed pattern) different from the specific display result when being controlled to the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), wherein the variable display period However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display ("ultra high speed lag (0.2 seconds)" whose variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern) can be executed,
Among the variable displays that are executed when the display result is the predetermined display result, which are executed when the special state is controlled, a ratio of the special variable display that is executed is different from the special variable display. (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate of selecting the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is higher than the rate of selecting any other variation pattern higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
When the special variable display is continuously performed (when the "ultra-high-speed lag (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern continues), the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display, and the special variable It is possible to execute the special variable display by using the decoration identification information that is the display result of the display (the combination of decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped by the previous super-high-speed deviation fluctuation, and the super-high-speed deviation fluctuation started Once the combination is expanded, the transparency becomes high, and after that, when the combination of decorative patterns is reduced, the combination of decorative patterns becomes a combination of decorative patterns that is fixed and stopped by the super-high-speed deviation fluctuation. Change)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In addition, the decoration identification information used for the special variable display executed earlier is also used for the special variable display executed later. This prevents the player from feeling troublesome due to an excessive amount of performance information to be presented.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
The gaming machine of means 17,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to the stopped decoration identification information (decorative pattern) when the special state (a time saving state of super high speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, The first additional information added to the background side of the decoration identification information (the pedestal design added to the background side of the number design in the third decoration design and corresponding to the outline of the number design), and the decoration identification information are emphasized. Second additional information displayed outside the area of the first additional information (In the third decorative pattern, it is added to the front side of the pedestal pattern on the background side of the number pattern, and a radial ray effect display displayed on the entire screen ), and can display
When controlled to a predetermined state (dream RUSH mode a time saving state) different from the special state, at least the second additional information is not displayed (pedestal pattern and light Neither effect display is displayed, or the pedestal design is displayed but the ray effect display is not displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a game machine, by emphasizing the decoration identification information in the special state, the decoration identification information can be easily recognized in a situation where the variable display period is short, and when the decoration identification information is variably displayed. It can give you a sense of speed.

The gaming machine of means 19 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
The starting condition (winning a prize to the starting winning opening) is satisfied, but the starting condition (the special symbol fluctuation display is not executed and neither the big win game state nor the small win game state is controlled) is satisfied. Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing the number of variable displays not displayed as a reservation storage number;
and a display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
When the special state (a time-saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0, the display result is a predetermined display result (failed pattern) different from the specific display result. A special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds "ultra-high speed lag (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern) can be executed,
Among the variable displays that are executed when the special state is controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the display result is the predetermined display result, the ratio of the special variable display that is executed is the special variable display. Higher than the rate at which a variable display different from is executed (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than any other variation higher than the rate at which the pattern is selected and higher than the sum of the rate at which all other variations are selected),
When the special state is controlled and the reserved storage number is 0, a special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result is the predetermined display result. (When the number of retained memories is 0, it is possible to select the "Pseudo-variation loss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern, which has a longer variation display period than the "Ultra-fast loss (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern. is),
In the special variable display, a variable display period common to the variable display period of the decoration identification information when the special variable display is executed ([period corresponding to variable display 0.2 seconds + period corresponding to design fixing stop 0.5 seconds = 0.7 second] cycle), a special control (constant-speed pseudo-variation effect) that executes variable display (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decorative patterns) multiple times. machine.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. Further, when the number of pending memories is 0, the special variable display with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding a situation where the variable display is not executed as much as possible, and as if the special variable display were performed multiple times. By showing the player as if the is being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not spoiled.

The gaming machine of means 20 is
The gaming machine of means 19,
The special variable display among the variable displays that are controlled in the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and executed when the number of reserved memories is 0, the display result of which is the predetermined display result. is executed at the highest rate (when the number of retained memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-variation miss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. higher than the sum of the selection rates of all other fluctuation patterns)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to avoid impairing the execution frequency and sense of speed of the variable display in the special state as much as possible.

The gaming machine of means 21 is
A gaming machine of means 19 or means 20,
When it is controlled to a predetermined state (a time saving state of dream RUSH mode) different from the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the special control is not executed, and the variable display period is longer than the special variable display A long predetermined variable display can be executed (the "pseudo fluctuation out (2.8 seconds)" fluctuation pattern is not selected, and the "long fluctuation out (10 seconds)" fluctuation pattern can be selected)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a game machine, it is possible to clarify the characteristics of the special variable display in the special state, and to avoid the situation where the variable display is not executed as much as possible even when the predetermined state is controlled. can.

The game machine of means 22 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
and a display means (image display device 5),
As the special states, there are a first special state (a time saving state of the dream RUSH mode) and a second special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first special state. can be,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which a display result is a predetermined display result (defective pattern) different from the specific display result when being controlled to the second special state, wherein the variable display period is the next following from the end of the variable display. It is possible to execute a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period until the variable display starts (variable display of the "ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) and
Among the variable displays that are executed when the display result is the predetermined display result, the ratio of the special variable display that is executed when the control is performed to the second special state is such that the variable display different from the special variable display is performed. Higher than the execution rate (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The ratio of the variable display period of the variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result when controlled to the second special state is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second) when the control is performed to the first special state. is higher than the percentage of the variable display period of the variable display that is the predetermined display result is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second),
The production executing means is
When being controlled to the first special state, the display means can display a first special display (first logo display) for notifying that it is controlled to the first special state,
capable of executing a first specific change effect (first logo cycle change effect) for changing the aspect of the first special display;
When being controlled to the second special state, a second special display (second logo display) for notifying that the second special state is being controlled can be displayed on the display means;
It is possible to execute a second specific change effect (second logo period change effect) that changes the mode of the second special display,
The cycle in which the mode of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than the cycle in which the mode of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect (the change in the second logo cycle change effect) The cycle (0.5s) is shorter than the change cycle (5s) in the first logo cycle change effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In addition, in the second special state in which the special variable display is performed at a high rate, the period in which the mode of the second special display changes is short, so that the short variable display period in the second special state can be emphasized. .

The gaming machine of means 23 is
The gaming machine of means 22,
A game area (2) in which a game medium is fired,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When it is controlled to the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game medium to the first game area than to the second game area (start condition for special symbol variation display easily established),
When the special state (high base state (time reduction state): a time reduction state, b time reduction state) is controlled, the player prefers to shoot the game medium to the second game area rather than the first game area. It is advantageous for (the starting condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is easily established)
In the first specific change effect, the aspect of the first special display changes in the direction from the first game area to the second game area (periodically emits light from the left end to the right end of the first logo display) changes in form),
In the second specific change effect, the aspect of the second special display changes in the direction from the first game area to the second game area (periodically emits light from the left end to the right end of the second logo display) form changes)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the first special display notifies that the control is in the first special state and indicates that the area where the player should shoot the game medium ball is the second game area. In addition, the second special display notifies that the control is in the second special state, and notifies that the area where the player should shoot the game medium is the second game area. It becomes possible to

The gaming machine of means 24 is
A game machine of means 22 or means 23,
Equipped with a game area (2) in which game media are shot,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) is controlled, an instruction display (“right hitting”) instructing the second game area to shoot the game medium A first system display and a second system display including characters and a rightward arrow) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
The mode of the instruction display changes from the first game area to the second game area (a mode in which a rightward arrow moves periodically from left to right),
The change speed of the instruction display mode in the second special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) is the change speed of the instruction display mode in the first special state (dream RUSH mode a time saving state) is greater than (the arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to inform the player of the area in which the game medium should be shot and to further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The game machine of means 25 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
Storage means (RAM 102) for storing information (holding information) on variable display for which the start condition is met but not for start condition, and information on variable display for which the start condition is met (information on variable display being executed). )and,
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production,
The production executing means is
A corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) is controlled, it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When it is controlled to the second special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), the corresponding display is higher than when it is controlled to the first special state (a time saving state of dream RUSH mode) The rotation speed is high (the rotation cycle of the second rotation correspondence display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation cycle of the first rotation correspondence display is 3 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a game machine, by rotating the corresponding display, it is possible to recognize that it is under control in the special state, and when it is under control in the second special state, it is controlled in the first special state. The shortness of the variable display period can be more emphasized by rotating the corresponding display faster than when the display is on.

The gaming machine of means 26 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which a display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when being controlled to the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), wherein the variable display period is a variable display. A special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the to the start of the next variable display. display) can be executed, and
Of the variable displays that are executed when the display result is the predetermined display result, which is executed when the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, the ratio of the special variable display to be executed is Higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the other higher than the percentage of any variation pattern selected, higher than the sum of the selection percentages of all other variation patterns),
The production executing means is
When the variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result is the specific display result (big hit symbol), the decoration identification information can be stopped and displayed (a state in which common decoration symbols are aligned). It is possible to execute a "design matching effect" that stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns with
In the special state (a time-saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the decoration identification information is stopped when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result is the specific display result (big hit symbol). It is possible not to display it (it is possible to start the round display accompanying the start of the big win game state without executing the "symbol matching effect" in the case of the big win)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In addition, in the special state, it is possible not to stop display the decoration identification information when the control is in an advantageous state. By emphasizing the speediness of the display, it is possible to give the impression of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 27 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A normal state (low base state), a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a controllable state control means (CPU 103);
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variation display of special symbols, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of small symbols) ,
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to control to the advantageous state,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a special display result (small winning symbol), it is possible to control to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (V winning area 870) while being controlled to the special state,
A variable display in which a display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when being controlled to the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), wherein the variable display period is a variable display. A special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the to the start of the next variable display. display) can be executed, and
Of the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result, which is executed when the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, the ratio of the special variable display to be executed is Higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the other higher than the percentage of any variation pattern selected, higher than the sum of the selection percentages of all other variation patterns),
The production executing means is
When the variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result is the specific display result (big hit symbol), the decoration identification information can be stopped and displayed (a state in which common decoration symbols are aligned). It is possible to execute a "symbol matching effect" that stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns with
In the special state (a time-saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when the variable display (variable display of special symbols) in which the display result is the special display result (small hit symbol) is executed, the decoration identification information is displayed. It is possible to stop display (it is possible to execute a "symbol matching effect" in the big hit via the small win), and the display result is the specific display result (big hit pattern) Variable display (variable display of special symbols) ) is executed, it is possible to prevent the decoration identification information from being stopped and displayed (in the case of a big hit, it is possible to start the round display accompanying the start of the big win game state without executing the “symbol matching effect”). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is the predetermined display result during the period during which the special state is controlled, an extremely short variable display period is selected at a high rate. The user can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that the variable display is executed. In the special state, when the display result is a variable display in which the display result is a special display result, the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed, thereby clarifying the flow of the game and allowing the game medium to pass through the specific area. It is possible to direct attention to playing a game. On the other hand, when the variable display with the display result as the specific display result is executed, the decoration identification information is not stopped and displayed, so that the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the variable that triggers the advantageous state is displayed. By emphasizing the speediness of the display, it is possible to give the impression of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 28 is
A game machine of means 26 or 27,
The state control means is controllable to a predetermined state (a time saving state of dream RUSH mode) different from the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of a special symbol) is executed in which the display result is the specific display result (big hit symbol), the decoration identification information can be stopped and displayed (at the big hit symbol). It is possible to execute "design match production")
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a game machine, the difference between the predetermined state and the special state can be clarified by the difference in the display of the decoration identification information, and a special feeling can be generated when the display result in the special state becomes the specific display result. can.

The gaming machine of means 29 is
The gaming machine according to means 28,
A special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) controlled between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) more advantageous to the player than the first state,
A variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (lost pattern) executed in the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), and the variable display has a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period. The execution ratio of (variation display of the “super high speed loss (0.2 seconds)” variation pattern whose variation display period is shorter than the pattern confirmation period of 0.5 seconds) is executed in the predetermined state (a time saving state of dream RUSH mode) is higher than the execution rate of the variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (lost pattern) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period,
After the end of the start effect corresponding to the start of the advantageous state, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (after the end of the fanfare effect, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened),
Execution of the start effect when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display performed in the predetermined state and when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display performed in the special state. The period is shorter than the confirmation period of the specific display result (when a big hit occurs based on the variable display performed in the a time saving state of the dream RUSH mode, and when the super high speed HYPER RUSH mode was performed in the a time saving state In both cases, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the period of finalizing the design of the jackpot design, even when the big hit is generated based on the variable display.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the time from the start of the advantageous state to the time the special variable means is controlled to the second state is longer when it is controlled to the predetermined state and when it is controlled to the special state. It is possible to make the period shorter and prevent the player from waiting for the period until the game value is given after the notification of the display result. In particular, in the special state, control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the end of the variable display, and the advantageous state can be obtained after the start of the variable display. It is possible to show the player a series of steps until the game value is given in .

The gaming machine of means 30 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) more advantageous to the player than the first state;
special light emitting means (light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or at the opening/closing portion) provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means;
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (V winning area 870) while being controlled to the special state,
When it is controlled to the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state), it is controlled to the special state than when it is controlled to the normal state (low base state) high frequency,
The production executing means is
When it is controlled to the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result (symbol jackpot occurs), and when controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area while being controlled to the special state (when a big win via a small win occurs). At any time, the special light emitting means is caused to emit light (the light emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light), and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. When the special variable means is controlled to the second state, an instruction display (display of "Aim at the attacker!") for instructing the special variable means to shoot the game medium is displayed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to display on the display means (image display device 5).

According to such a gaming machine, when being controlled to the special state, either the case of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the special state or the case of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result. In this case, since the special light emitting means emits light and the instruction display is displayed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the advantageous state is controlled based on the specific display result. In other words, even though it is controlled to a special state and it is easy to be controlled to an advantageous state via a special state, even in a normal state, an advantageous state based on a specific display result that can occur with the same probability It is possible to prevent the person from feeling sorry for what happened.

The gaming machine of means 31 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
A movable accessory (movable body 02TM100),
display means (image display device 5);
a storage means (RAM 102) for storing information relating to variable display;
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
Corresponding information corresponding to variable display (suspended display corresponding to non-executed variable display (reserved storage), active display corresponding to executed variable display) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5). can be,
As the display mode of the corresponding display, there are a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that in the first mode,
The production executing means is
based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a mode change effect for changing the corresponding display from the first mode to the second mode,
It is possible to execute a movable role production (maximum action production) for moving the movable role from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum production position),
After the execution of the movable role production, in response to moving the movable role from the second position to the first position, a related display related to the movable role (same as the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 ally character 02TM30B) can be displayed on the display means,
The related display executes an action effect acting on the corresponding display (a second effect effect in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs toward the pending display or the active display among the second effect change effects), and the The mode change effect for the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect (the second effect change effect, the second corresponding display change in which the bomb hit suspension display or the active display changes from the normal mode to the red mode A game machine characterized by being able to execute a performance).

According to such a game machine, the effect effect and the mode change effect are executed in cooperation with the movable accessory, the related display related to the movable accessory, and the corresponding display, thereby simply acting on the corresponding display. As compared with the case where only an effect in which the corresponding display changes is executed, it is possible to improve interest when the corresponding display changes.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
The gaming machine of means 31,
The movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating a specific character (ally character),
The related display (friend character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The production executing means is
A battle presentation in which the specific character battles (a battle presentation in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5),
A game characterized in that, when the battle effect is executed, a victory effect in which the specific character wins (a victory effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character) can be executed when the control is made to the advantageous state. machine.

According to such a gaming machine, the relationship between the movable accessory and the specific character displayed on the display means makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the series of effects, and at the same time, the specific character is important to the player. By recognizing the character, the player can have a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 is
A game machine of means 31 or means 32,
As the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode (normal mode), and the advantageous state is higher than the second mode (red mode). There is a predetermined mode (blue mode) with a low degree of expectation controlled by
The effect executing means, as the mode change effect, changes the corresponding display from the first mode to the predetermined mode (change from the normal mode to the blue mode), and changes the corresponding display to the second mode. A second mode change effect (change from normal mode to red mode) that changes from the first mode to the second mode can be executed,
When the second mode change effect is executed, the effect effect (the first effect in which the ally character throws a bomb toward the suspended display or the active display) is targeted for the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change effect The rate at which the effect or the second effect effect) is executed is that when the first mode change effect is executed, the effect effect is executed for the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change effect. higher than the proportion
The production executing means is
moving the movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position); is possible and
displaying the related display (friend character 02TM30B) corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory from the predetermined position to the first position, and executing the action presentation in which the related display acts on the corresponding display; A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the first mode change effect for the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to diversify the mode change effect and to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the effect effect when the movable accessory moves.

The gaming machine of means 34 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) provides, as the effect effects, a first effect effect (a first effect effect in which a friendly character throws a bomb toward a reserved display or an active display), and the first effect effect. a second effect effect (a second effect effect in which a friendly character throws three bombs toward a reserved display or an active display) with higher visibility than the
When the second mode change effect is executed, the ratio of the execution of the second action effect targeting the corresponding display to be the target of the second mode change effect is determined by the ratio of the execution of the second action effect at the time when the first mode change effect is executed. a game machine characterized in that the ratio of execution of the second action effect for the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change effect is higher than that at which the second effect effect is executed.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to diversify action effects and draw attention to characters appearing in the action effects. In addition, by executing an effect effect with high visibility, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation that the correspondence display will change to a more expected aspect.

The gaming machine of means 35 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) has a shape that imitates the face of the specific character (a friend character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (friend character 02TM30B) includes an image of the face of the specific character,
When the movable accessory is moving from the second position (maximum presentation position) to the first position (initial position) after the execution of the movable accessory presentation, the presentation executing means (the presentation control CPU 120) and when the movable accessory moves to the first position (initial position), the related display (friend character 02TM30B) can be continuously displayed on the display means (image display device 5). Characteristic game machine.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to emphasize the relevance between the movable accessory and the related display, and to emphasize the production effect of the specific character through the cooperation between the movable accessory and the related display.

The gaming machine of means 36 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the action effects, a first effect effect (a production in which a friendly character throws a bomb toward a suspended display or an active display) and a second effect effect (a friendly character is suspended) with higher visibility than the first effect effect A presentation of throwing three bombs toward the display or active display),
It is possible to execute the movable character production (intermediate action production) and execute the first action production after executing the suggestive production (change sign production) that suggests that the action production is to be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the movable accessory production (maximum action production) and to execute the second action production after executing the suggestive production.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player expect the action of the movable accessory and the appearance of the specific character by the suggestive effect. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the first action presentation and the second action presentation is executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state different from the advantageous state and more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
a performance execution means;
a display means;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The production executing means is
a first special display representing the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means when being controlled to the first special state;
It is possible to execute a first specific change effect that changes the mode of the first special display,
a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means when being controlled to the second special state;
It is possible to execute a second specific change effect that changes the mode of the second special display,
A gaming machine, wherein a cycle in which the mode of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than a cycle in which the mode of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect.

Images